ERTU Tech Description

Foreword, Table of Contents
The SICAM eRTU System 1

SICAM eRTU Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU 2
Input / Output Modules 3
Technical Description
Time Signal Receiver 4
System Functions 5
Functions of the Digital Input Module 6
Functions of the Analog Input Modules 7
Functions of the Command Output Module 8
Functions of the Command Release Module 9
Configuration System
SICAM plusTOOLS 10
Communication with the Control Center 11
Anhang A
References, Glossary, Index
Release: 14.10.04
E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Notes on Safety This manual does not constitute a complete catalog of all safety measures required for
operating the equipment (module, device) in question because special operating conditions
might require additional measures. However, it does contain notes that must be adhered to
for your own personal safety and to avoid damage to property. These notes are highlighted
with a warning triangle and different keywords indicating different degrees of danger:
Danger
means that death, severe injury, or substantial damage to property will occur if the
appropriate safety measures are not taken.
Warning
means that death, severe injury, or substantial damage to property can occur if the
appropriate safety measures are not taken.
Caution
means that minor injury or damage to property can occur if the appropriate safety measures
are not taken.
Note:
is important information about the project, handling the product, or the part of the
documentation in question, to which special attention must be paid.
Qualified Personnel
Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) described in this manual
must be performed by qualified personnel only. As used in the safety notes contained in this
manual, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, release,
ground, and tag devices, systems, and electrical circuits in accordance with safety
standards.
Use as Prescribed
The equipment (device, module) must not be used for any other purposes than those
described in the Catalog and the Technical Description. If it is used together with third-party
devices and components, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct and safe operation of the product requires adequate transportation, storage,
installation, and mounting as well as appropriate use and maintenance.
During operation of electrical equipment, it is unavoidable that certain parts of this
equipment will carry dangerous voltages. Severe injury or damage to property can occur if
the appropriate measures are not taken:
• Before making any connections at all, ground the equipment at the PE terminal.
• Hazardous voltages can be present on all switching components connected to the
power supply.
• Even after the supply voltage has been disconnected, hazardous voltages can still be
present in the equipment (capacitor storage).
• Equipment with current transformer circuits must not be operated while open.
• The limit values indicated in the manual or the operating instructions must not be
exceeded; that also applies to testing and commissioning.
Disclaimer Copyright
We checked the compliance of the contents of the printed Copyright  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved
document with the described hardware and software. However, Unless expressly permitted otherwise, this document is to be
inconsistencies may not be excluded so that we do not warrant total retained, reproduction, exploitation and disclosure of its contents is
compliance. not allowed. Liability for damages in the case of non-compliance. All
This manual is revised regularly and any necessary corrections are rights reserved, in particular if patent is granted or GM registration
incorporated in the subsequent editions. Proposals for is obtained.
improvement welcome.
Registered trademarks
Technical changes reserved. SIMATIC®, SIMATIC NET®, SINAUT® and SICAM® are registered
5.10.01 trademarks of SIEMENS AG. The other designations in this manual
could be trademarks whose use by third persons for their respective
purposes could violate the rights of their owners.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Book No. E50417-S8976-C179-A2

Foreword
Purpose of this In this manual, you will find a

manual
System overview
Description of the hardware components and their functions
Description of the central functions
Overview over the SICAM eRTU software products
Target audience This manual is intended mainly for all persons who configure,
parameterize and operate a SICAM eRTU.
Scope of validity of SICAM eRTU Version 5.10

this manual
Standards SICAM eRTU was developed according to the ISO 9001:2000 quality
standards.
Further support If you have any questions about the SICAM eRTU system, please
contact your
Siemens sales representative.
Hotline Our hotline offers you around-the-clock support.

Phone: ++49 -180 - 5 24 70 00
Fax: ++49 -180 - 5 24 24 71
e-mail: ptd.support@siemens.com
Training courses If you are interested in our topical training program, please contact our
training center:
Siemens AG
Power Transmission and Distribution
Power Training Center
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nürnberg
Germany
Phone: ++49 - 911 - 4 33 70 05
Fax: ++49 - 911 - 4 33 79 29
Internet: www.ptd-training.com
SICAM eRTU Technical Description 3

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Foreword
Overview over the SICAM for eRTU Documentation
This overview will give you a rough idea of which information or guideline
can be found in which manual.
Planning • Which hardware and software components are necessary for

covering the requirements of my project?
• Can I integrate existing components?
• Can I use my PC?
• Which system knowledge is necessary for system management?
/18/ SICAM eRTU, Technical Description
/16/ SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design
Ordering • Who can provide support on technical and handling questions?

• Is my order complete and correct?
Assembling, • Which safety measures are required?

mounting hardware
• Which order and which rules must be observed for the mounting
components
procedure?
/3/ SIMATIC S7/M7, Programmable Controllers Module Specifications
S7-400, M7-400
/17/ SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions
Installing the • How do I proceed for installing?

software
• Which details have to be observed when authorizing?
• Which prerequisites must be given?
/14/ SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS
Product Information
Configuring / • Which is the right order for configuring/parameterizing?

parameterizing
• Where do I set which parameters?
• How do I download my data to the PLC?
• Which tools are available for a data test?
• How can I document my data?
• How do I archive data?
4 SICAM eRTU Technical Description

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Foreword
/20/ SICAM eRTU, Startup

Online help system
Configuring • Where do I configure a control?

the control
• Which functions are included as blocks in the scope of delivery?
• How do I test and compile the configured control?
/1/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2
/4/ SIMATIC S7, CFC for S7, Manual
/15/ SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks
Online help system
Commissioning • How do I avoid disturbances, accidents when commissioning my

system / during operation?
• Which persons are able / authorized to operate my system?
Diagnostics / • Does the system require any maintenance?

troubleshooting
• What is the reason for a system fault indication, what is the appro-
priate remedy?
• Where can I configure additional error messages?
/13/ SICAM RTU, Mounting Instructions
/19/ SICAM Diamond

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Foreword

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
1 The SICAM eRTU System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.1.1 SICAM eRTU system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1.2 Options for expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.1.3 SICAM eRTU Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2 System Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3 System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.3.1 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.3.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.3.3 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.4 Expandability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2 Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1 Mounting of the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.1 Description of Free-Standing Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.2 Technical Specifications of the Free-Standing Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1.3 Wall-Mounting Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.1 UR1/UR2 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
2.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.3.1 PS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.3.2 Battery Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.4 CPU (Central Processing Unit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.4.1 CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.4.2 Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.4.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.5 MCP Communications Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.5.1 MCP Communications Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.5.2 25-Pin RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.5.3 25-Pin RS422/RS485 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.5.4 XC2 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.5.5 XF6 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.5.6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.6 IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.6.1 IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 Interface Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.6.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.6.3 IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 Interface Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3 Input / Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.1 Module Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2 DI Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.2.1 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.2 Electrical Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2.3 Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
3.3 AI Analogue Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.3.1 Input Circuit of the AI-32 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.3.2 Input Circuit of the AI-16 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.3.3 Overvoltage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.3.4 Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.3.5 A/D converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.3.6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.4 CO Command Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.4.1 Command Output on the CO Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.4.2 Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.4.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.5 CR Command Release Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.5.1 Command Release on the CR Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.5.2 Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.5.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.6 Status and Diagnostic Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4 Time Signal Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.1 DCF77 Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.1.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2 GPS Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.2.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.3 IRIG-B Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
5 System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.1 Interplay between the CPU and MCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.2 Change in Operating State of the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.3 Organization Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5.4 Diagnostic Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.5 Status Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.6 General Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.7 Clock Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6 Functions of the Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.1 State Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.2 Indications of the DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.3 Bitstrings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.4 Transformer Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.5 Metered Value Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.6 Parameters of the DI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7 Functions of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.1 Measured Value Capturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
7.2 Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8 Functions of the Command Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.1 Command Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.1.1 Single Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.1.2 Double Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.2 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.3 Parameters of the CO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
9 Functions of the Command Release Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.1 Inputs of the CR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.1.1 Indications of the CR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.1.2 State Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.2 Outputs of the CR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.2.1 Digital Output of the CR Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.3 Parameters of the Command Release Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10 Configuration System
SICAM plusTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10.1 Configuring and Parameterizing the SICAM eRTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10.2 Communication with Bay Devices/Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.3 Information Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.4 Telecontrol Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
10.5 SICAM CFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10.6 SICAM Diamond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
10.7 Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
11 Communication with the Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
11.1 Data Exchange with the Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
11.1.1 Types of Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
11.1.2 Types of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
11.1.3 Types of Transmission (Operating Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
11.1.4 Spontaneous Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11.1.5 Scanned Transmission Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
11.1.6 Cyclic Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.1.7 Telecontrol Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
11.2 Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
11.2.1 Communication Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
11.2.2 Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
11.2.3 Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
11.2.4 User Area in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
11.2.5 Transmission Procedures of the IEC 60870-5-T101 Telegram Structure . 232
11.2.6 Safety functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
11.3 Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-104 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
11.3.2 Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
11.3.3 Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
11.3.4 User Area in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
11.3.5 Differences to the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
11.4 Control Center Link with the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
11.4.1 Pulse Duration Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
11.4.2 Address Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
11.4.3 Information Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
11.4.4 Organizational Telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
11.4.5 Pulse Code Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
11.4.6 Multi-Point Transmission SINAUT 8-FW Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
11.5 Control Center Link with the DNP V3.00 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
11.5.1 Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
11.5.2 Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents
11.6 Control Center Link with the TELEGYR 800 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
11.6.2 Telegram Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
11.6.3 User Area in the TELEGYR 800 Telegram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
11.6.4 Information in Monitoring Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
11.6.5 Information in Control Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
A Anhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
A.1 Indications of the Transmission Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
A.2 Indications of the Substation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
A.3 Indications of the Bay Device Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
References
Glossary
Index

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table of Contents

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The SICAM eRTU System 1
Introduction The SICAM eRTU is an open modular telecontrol and substation
automation system. The specific functions of a telecontrol system are
combined with those of a programmable automation system..
Objective The purpose of this chapter is to specify the performance characteristics

of SICAM eRTU in a brief system overview.
Contents 1.1 System Description 16
1.2 System Safety 27
1.3 System Capacity 29
1.4 Expandability 33

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1 The SICAM eRTU System
1.1 System Description
Increasingly high demands are being placed on safe and reliable

management of supply networks for electricity, water, gas, remote
heating, and waste water treatment plants for both industrial and private
sectors.
Demands for economic efficiency, shorter down times, and a heightened
environmental consciousness set the standards by which the capability,
reliability and availability of these systems are measured.
Central monitoring and control of these geographically widespread
processes and quick reactions to possible malfunctions are important
prerequisites for cost efficient management.
SICAM eRTU The SICAM eRTU system offers you a system solution which has been
optimized to meet these demands. The specific functions of a telecontrol
unit are combined with the versatility of a programmable automation
system designed for the automation of geographically widespread
processes.
SICAM eRTU is used for applications where
distributed processes are monitored and controlled.
functions which used to be available on the higher control level are
decentralised and localised on-site.
high requirements are made for voltage immunity and
electromagnetic compatibility.
a real-time capable system is required.
immunity to interfering is very important.
communication with other automation systems must be possible.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
SICAM eRTU fulfils the following main tasks:

System control and monitoring by a control center using safe and
reliable remote data transmission protocols
Connection of protection / bay devices and substations
A wide variety of communication capabilities using various
transmission mediums (WT, TFH, FO, and radio relay)
Safe and reliable process inputs/outputs with high isolation voltage
(2.5 kV)
Fast, sequential processing of digital and analog process data with
high-resolution time stamp (1 millisecond)
Conditioning and compression of the process data acquired (e.g.,
generation of counting values, processing of threshold values,
change in state delay, debouncing, and signal settling)
Flow-optimized remote data transmission (i.e., spontaneous, cyclic or
scanned transmission, differentiated scan lists, priority increase,
general check, and selective telegram request)
Specific With the flexible configuration tool SICAM CFC a variety of automation
automation tasks tasks can be realised individually. These include:
Output of command sequences
Command interlocks
Generation of group indications
Indication logging
Sequential control systems
Connection of bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Applications There are almost no limits to the wide variety of applications for which the
modular and open SICAM eRTU system can be used:
Supply networks of cities and regional supply companies (e.g., gas,
electricity, water, waste water and remote heating)
Transformer substations of supraregional power supply companies
Supply networks for public transportation (subways, commuter trains
and street cars)
Data acquisition and control of systems in the buildings of railroads
and public transportation (escalators, lighting, and air-conditioning,
among others)
Traffic control systems for trains and ships
Weirs, locks and dams involved in water resource systems
Water purification and storage systems
Monitoring and control of chemical and petrochemical systems and
pipelines
Monitoring and control of conveyor and transportation systems
Environmental technology with acquisition of measuring data and
remote evaluation
Communications The system's communication processors support the communication

protocols protocols for
Control centre interface
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP)
SINAUT 8-FW
DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800
TELEGYR 8979
Substation communication
IEC 60870-5-101
Bay device connection
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP V3.00
PROFIBUS DP

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.1.1 SICAM eRTU system architecture
The typical SICAM eRTU architecture is:

Substation controller SICAM eRTU (SICAM eRTU Controller)
Connection to the higher-level control centres
Serial link to bay level / to substations
PG (programming device) or PC with SICAM plusTOOLS
Control centre / node
DCF77 e. g. IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM plusTOOLS
Configuration
SICAM eRTU
Controller
SIMATIC NET
Process interface
Substation Bay devices with IEC 60870-5-103

SUC251,wmf
Fig. 1-1 Configuration of a SICAM eRTU, example
Information on configuration options, as well as a list of the components,

can be found in the
SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/ and in
SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Control centre The IEC 60870-5-104 telegram can be used to establish a

communication communication link with a higher-level control center via LAN / WAN.
with IEC 60870-5-
Possible link configurations are:
104
RS232 interface - Terminal Server - LAN - Router - WAN
RS232 interface - Router - WAN
to control center (via WAN)
Router
Station LAN (Industrial Ethernet)
Terminal Server
RS232 port
SICAM eRTU
Controller
LAN Local Area Network

WAN Wide Area Network
SUC254.wmf
Fig. 1-2 Control center communication with IEC 60870-5-104 via Terminal Server and
Industrial Ethernet

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
to control center (via WAN)
Router
RS232 port
SICAM eRTU
Controller
SUC255.wmf
Fig. 1-3 Control center communication with IEC 60870-5-104
Bay device
connection via Control centre / node
PROFIBUS e.g. IEC 60870-5-101
DCF77
PS 20A DC 48/20 CPU 488-3 CP 443-5 XC2 XF6
0XX0000-0XX00 XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
0XX0000-0XX00
X X3 X2 X X2 X X2
1 2 3 X 4 5 34 3 4 3 4
6ES7
CP xxx41x-1XJ00-0AB0 443-5FX00-0XE0
CP xx x &MD1010-0BA00 6MD1010-0BA20
CP xxx P 6MD1010-0BA20
CP xxx P
s
INTF INTF
INTF EXTF
EXTF
SD
HD
BATT1F USR1
BATT2F
USR2
BAF
DC5V
DC24V RUN RUN T1 T1
STOP STOP
RUN R1 R1
FMR STOP
RUN
RUN-P STOP
RUN T2 T2
STOP
MRES R2 R2
T3 T3
BATT 1 BATT 2
R3 R3
T4 T4
R4 R4
2BATT
T5 T5
OFF
1BATT
R5 R5
T6 T6
X1
L+ EXT.-BATT. PROFIBUS
L- R6 R6
PE
5 ... 15 V DC
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS-DP 20 21 22 23 24 25 PROFIBUS-DP 20 21 22 23 24 25
s s
SIMEAS Q RUN BF DIA
SIMEAS Q RUN BF DIA
7KG-8000-8AB/BB 7KG-8000-8AB/BB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q ET200
suc194
Fig. 1-4 SICAM eRTU, bay device connection via PROFIBUS DP - Example

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Communication You can establish from the SICAM eRTU a link to all types of substations
with substations which are able to communicate using the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol (in
unbalanced mode). These include
SICAM SC,
SICAM RTU,
SICAM miniRTU,
SICAM microRTU,
SINAUT LSA and
Third-party stations.
Substations can be connected in a point-to-point configuration, a line
configuration or a combination of both.
SICAM eRTU
Controller
Substations
SICAM SC SICAM RTU SICAM miniRTU Third-party station

SUC252.wmf
Fig. 1-5 Communication with different substations in point-to-point configuration - Example

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A line configuration can cater for up to 16 connected substations.
SICAM eRTU
Controller
Substation x
Substation y
Substation z
suc253.wmf
Fig. 1-6 Communication with substations in line configuration - Example
Note:
If the substations are not supported by an RS485 interface, a modem is
required.
If longer distances must be bridged, modems which permit staggering
must be used for the required RS232 interfaces.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.1.2 Options for expansion
The modular design of the system allows any combination within the
limits of the system capacity described in Chapter1.3.
If a substation is required, provide the SICAM eRTU controller with up to
3040 central input / output points.
Maximum
expansion Variant 1 Control centre / node
SICAM plusTOOLS
Configuration
e.g. DCF77 e. g. IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM eRTU
Controller
SIMATIC NET
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
IM 461-0
3040 Information - central
SUC146
Fig. 1-7 SICAM eRTU with maximum number of input / output points

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Maximum If a controller with many communication interfaces is required, the

expansion Variant 2 SICAM eRTU controller with 3 connections can be expanded to higher-
level control centres and 96 links to the bay level.
Control centre / node
e.g. DCF77 e. g. IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM eRTU Controller

SICAM plusTOOLS
Configuration
SIMATIC NET
Bay devices with IEC 60870-5-103

SUC147
Fig. 1-8 SICAM eRTU connected with the maximum number of MCP
(example for configuration).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.1.3 SICAM eRTU Controller
Base system The following components form the basic equipment of a SICAM eRTU
Hardware controller in a free-standing cabinet:
Power Supply
SIMATIC S7-400 CPU
MCP (Modular Communication Processor)
IM (Interface Module to expansion rack), if required
Additional I/O modules

modules of the
Time signal receiver for DCF77, GPS or IRIG-B
SICAM eRTU
Controller
eRTU Runtime SICAM RTC eRTU (Run Time Components)

system
Configuration tools SICAM plusTOOLS eRTU, application for planning and

parameterizing the plant configuration.
SICAM plusTOOLS uses the SIMATIC base software STEP 7.
Logging /Control / SICAM Diamond is used for diagnosing system information (MCP data,
Diagnostics telegram sequences, etc.) and also serves as a simple Human Machine
Interface. The process can be graphically represented in single-line
diagrams. Additionally, the process can be monitored and controlled.
State changes are logged in the event list.
User programs User-specific functions are realised with SICAM CFC.

With the standard SIMATIC programming languages AWL or SCL,
application programs can be created independently of SICAM eRTU.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.2 System Safety
1.2 System Safety
The SICAM eRTU system to a large extent fulfills the reliability and safety
requirements which have to be met by a substation automation system.
Special attention was paid to the electromagnetic compatibility of all
electronic devices which are part of the SICAM eRTU system.
Power supply The SICAM eRTU system is designed for maintenance-free duty, i.e. no
interruption back-up batteries are needed for restart after a mains failure.
Safety functions Hardware self-test: during startup and cyclically in the background.
General Interrogation:
− during the start of the runtime system
− in the background.
Communication Data transmission errors resulting from electromagnetic interference,

ground potential differences, ageing of components and other
interference and noise sources in the transmission channels are safely
detected. The safety precautions included in the protocols protect
against:
bit and telegram errors
information loss
undesired information
separation of or adverse effects on related information.
Telegram Event-triggered telegrams are made available quickly thanks to priority

transmission with control.
priority control

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Indication The status for indications is derived in the case of:

acquisition
contact chatter
signaling-circuit voltage failure
module out of order.
A telecontrol malfunction group indication can be parameterized with

SICAM CFC from
individual items of information, for example:
mcb trip
voice-frequency telegraphy error
Channel Error
No signaling voltage
module out of order
buffer overflow.
Measured Value Live zero monitoring (4-20 mA).

Capturing
CO Command Safe command output with central command output modules, i.e.
Output Module
target check (1-out-of-n)
Switching current check
interference voltage monitoring
determination of the coil resistance.
The SICAM eRTU system provides the following five operating modes,
thus allowing to take into account different safety requirements for
process output:
1-pole command output
1 1/2-pole command output
2-pole command output
1 1/2-pole command output with release through CR module
2-pole command output with release through CR module.
By combining the CO module with the CR module, a single error (in case
of 1 1/2-pole command output) in the command output circuit results in
the command not being executed.
Through the test and monitoring measures provided by the CR module,
which make it possible to distribute the command output circuit to two
independent modules, the high VDEW requirements are met.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.3 System Capacity
1.3 System Capacity
1.3.1 Information
The maximum expansion of the SICAM eRTU controller consists of:

1 Central rack with 7 to 11 unoccupied slots, depending on the
communication assembly MCP which is selected (see Chapter 2.5)
and
up to 6 expansion racks with 14 unoccupied slots each.
This gives a maximum of 95 unoccupied slots which can be equipped
with, for instance
− 95 function modules (input and output) or
− additional 4 MCP(4) assemblies (5 slots each to connect max. 96 bay
devices via fibre-optic cables) and
75 function modules (input and output).
The connection to PROFIBUS DP does not require an own slot as it is
realised via an interface of the CPU module.
Central information You can supply 32 central items of information to each function module.
points This provides a maximum number of 3 040 central items of information,
which can be parameterized as::
Single-point indications
Double-point indications
Fleeting indications
Bit pattern indication
Transformer tap indication
Metered value indication
Measured value indication
Single command
Double command
Analog scheduled values
Digital set-point values (16 central items of information per module)
Distributed Local bay devices and substations are connected via the communication
information points interfaces of the MCP assemblies or via the PROFIBUS DP interface.
The maximum expansion provides up to 10 000 local items of
information.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.3.2 Interfaces
Telecontrol A SICAM eRTU Controller can be expanded with independent interfaces

interfaces to max. 3 higher-level control centres. Telecontrol protocols
IEC 60870-5-101.
SINAUT 8-FW
DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800
TELEGYR 8979
IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP),
are operated with interface standard RS232.
Alternatively, for telecontrol protocol
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM TC)
you can use interface standards X.21 (RS485) and
RS422 (RS485).
The connection is realised via the interfaces of the communication
processor MCP and the XC2 expansion module of the MCP assemblies.
It is possible to combine two different telecontrol protocols for one MCP
assembly.
Bay device The bay controller protocols

interfaces
IEC 60870-5-103 (COM IED) and
DNP V3.00 (COM IED)
require interface standard RS485 or an FO interface.
Various options exist for the connection of local items of information via
bay devices or substations:
fibre-optic interfaces to connect maximum 96 bay devices, realised
via maximum 4 MCP assemblies, each consisting of
- 1 communication processor MCP and
- 4 XF6 expansion modules.
RS485 lines to connect a maximum number of 96 bay devices,
realised via maximum 4 MCP assemblies consisting of
- 1 communication processor MCP or
- 1 communication processor MCP and
- 1 XC2 expansion module.
PROFIBUS DP interfaces, e.g. integrated on the CPU to connect bay
devices with PROFIBUS DP interface.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.3 System Capacity
Substation The protocol for substation connection

interfaces
IEC 60870-5-101 (COM IED)
requires interface standard RS232 or RS422 (RS485).
Substations are connected to the MCP and XC2 modules of the MCP
assemblies.
A maximum of 32 small substations with - - maximum 100 items of
information each or a large substation with maximum 2000 items of
information can be connected per MCP module..
With an MCP assembly, a maximum number of 4 interfaces can work
in the polling mode (lines).
A maximum number of 16 substations are managed per line.
Combinations of the above examples are possible, however, the number

of 10 000 information points and maximum 96 bay devices should not be
exceeded.
MPI Interface On the CPU, there is 1 MPI port (multipoint Token Ring bus topology)
which can be used for configuration, parameterization and connection of
SICAM Diamond.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.3.3 Environmental Conditions
The SICAM eRTU Controller must not be used in any other than
industrial environment.
Caution:
The following specifications apply to the modules described in this
manual. They do not generally apply to the standard SIMATIC modules.
If you have any questions concerning one of the latter modules, please
contact your local Siemens distributor.
Table 1-1 Environmental conditions for the SICAM eRTU Controller
Environmental conditions No-fan operation Yes
Degree of protection IP54 or IP20 (depending on the free-

standing cabinet)
Ambient air temperature for 0 °C to 55 °C

uninterrupted duty
relative humidity max. 95%rel
Storage temperature −40 °C to +70 °C

Climatic category, corresponding to IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3
• ambient temperature +5 to +40 °C
• temperature fluctuation 0.5 °C/min
• relative humidity 5 to 85 %rel
• absolute humidity 1 to 25 g/m3
• Condensation None
• atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa
• solar radiation 700 W/m2
• air movement 1.0 m/s
• wind-driven precipitation none
• water (except rain) none
• ice formation none

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1.4 Expandability
1.4 Expandability
SICAM has been designed for a new generation of devices and function
blocks for automating power supply switchgear.
SICAM integrates compatible product lines which complement each
other, and constitutes the consequent next step of development of field-
proven, widely-available components.
Thanks to its open system design, the SICAM eRTU can easily be
adapted to growing requirements in the future. System expansions and
upgrades can be realized without any problems for:
Bay devices
Protocols
SIMATIC standard input/output modules

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU 2
Overview The basic components of SICAM eRTU are those hardware components
which are necessary for power supply, control and communication of the
input/output modules. This includes also the free-standing cabinet and
the racks.
This chapter gives you a short description of the functional scope and the
technical specifications of the modules. For the environmental
conditions, please refer to Chapter 1.3.3.
The accessories and spare parts are not included in this documentation.
A list of these components can be found in
SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/.
Contents 2.1 Mounting of the Cabinet 36
2.2 Racks 42
2.3 Power Supply 45
2.4 CPU (Central Processing Unit) 49
2.5 MCP Communications Assembly 60
2.6 IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack 83

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2 Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU
2.1 Mounting of the Cabinet
2.1.1 Description of Free-Standing Cabinet
Properties The free-standing cabinet is a closed steel-sheet cabinet with central

grounding point and front door for individual or side-by-side mounting.
Degree of protection IP 54/IP 20
RAL 7032 for covering plates
Fixed-level mounting with brackets
Cable entry in base plate
Prepared for accommodation of extra accessories via C profile
mounting.
Rack A free-standing cabinet can accomodate

2 racks in fan-free operation
3 racks if adequate ventilation is provided.
The central rack is always installed in bottom position.
Power supply All supply voltages of the free-standing cabinet are conducted across the
terminal unit SVA power supply terminal unit . The central unit is supplied via a main
miniature circuit-breaker (mcb) and two subordinate mcbs in 2-pole
design with auxiliary signaling contact for digital input and output
modules. Depending on the degree of expansion, the terminal unit can
be extended. A mains filter is not provided.
End terminal
End terminal
PE conductor terminals
PE conductor terminals
1 A miniature circuit breaker
1 A miniature circuit breaker

(2-pole with aux. contact)

(each for 4 DI 6MD1021)
Main miniature circuit
(for all CO 6MD1022)

breaker (e. g. 10 A)
suc011f
Fig. 2-1 Example of the design of the power supply terminal unit SVA

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
f A e c Section A - B
d
C D
g
p
a
INTF
i
k SIMATIC SINAUT
p
s
ANT
SITOP
power 5
l
m
n
r
B
t
Section C - D
g Cable duct space

h Router
i Modem with power supply
k Load power supply
l Cable holder
m Power supply interface SVA
n Cable support and shielding bus
p Cable fastening and shielding bus
r Heating
a Central rack d Fault indicator with test key s Heating programmer
b Expansion rack e Cabinet lamp t Opening in bottom plate (cable entry)
c Eyebolt f Door contact u Central grounding point
suc207.wmf
Fig. 2-2 Example of a free-standing SICAM eRTU cabinet

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Connecting cables For logistic reasons only shielded cables are used. Of the input/output
modules, only the nur analog modules AI16 and AI32 need a shield,
which is already provided.
The cables used for connecting the MCP have double shields.
For more details, see SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions /17/.
For mounting FO cables, two-sheath spiral flexible cords with a diameter
of 32/40 mm (outside/inside diameter) are provided.
Maximum fitting: 24 FO conductor pairs
Mounting: At the cable support buses in the area of
the
cable ducts.
Mechanical The system has interfaces to the MCP communications processor. The
construction type of connection may differ from the basic variant, e.g.:
Basic variant: Direct connection of modules
MCP interfaces: at terminals
Lighting cabinet Optionally, the cabinet can be equipped with a 230 V AC lighting with
service socket-outlet and a 6 A mcb (2-pole). This arrangement can be
expanded for use with other 230 V AC applications.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.1.2 Technical Specifications of the Free-Standing Cabinet
Table 2-1 Technical specifications (overview) of the SICAM eRTU/RTU standard cabinet
Free-standing cabinet
Dimensions and weight Dimension [W × H × D] 800 mm × 2200 mm × 600 mm
Weight
• with one rack ca. 170 kg
• with two racks ca. 200 kg
Material Sheet metal

• Frame 2.5 mm
• Top and bottom rails 4.0 mm
• Door, walls, covering plates 1.5 mm
Coating Coating Epoxy-polyester-powder for indoor

mounting acc. to IEC 60721-3 Class 3K3
Color
• Frame, top rails and bottom rails RAL 7022 (gravel grey)
• Door, walls, covering plates RAL 7032 (pebble grey)
• Zierblende SN 617 (petrol)
Door Front door hinge right-handed
Acceptance angle
• Single mounting 180°
• Serial mounting 150°
Door lock Espagnolette lock and two-way key acc. to

DIN 43668-C35
(optional safety lock barrel)
Mounting of extra Possible E.g. modem via C-profile mounting

accessories
Connecting cables Copper cables wire-mesh shield
LWL-cable
• Design Spiral flexible cords, two-sheath
• Inside diameter ∅ 32 mm
• Outside diameter ∅ 40 mm
• Max.fitting 24 conductor pairs
Power supply Fusing

• Design • 1 main mcb, 2-pole, 16 A,
2 mcbs, 2-pole for signalling-circuit
voltage and command output voltage
Expandability • Mcb expansion kit, 2 A, with auxiliary
contact

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.1.3 Wall-Mounting Case
The standard wall mounting case is only used for installation of the
SICAM eRTU.
This closed sheet steel housing with central grounding point and fromt
door can accommodate one SICAM eRTU rack with nine slots, for of
which for process inputs/outputs. The cable entry is at the bottom.
Technical Sheet steel housing without trim strip

specifications
Wall mounting bracket
Mounting plate
Front door with right-handed hinge
Flange plate in the housing bottom
Dimensions in mm: 600 x 380 x 350 (H x W x D)
Degree of protection: IP54
Material thickness (steel sheet):
Housing 1.5 mm
Mounting plate 2.5 mm
Door 1.75 mm
Colour:
Mounting plate.......... RAL 2000 (yellow-orange)
Housing RAL 7032 (gravel gray)
Varnish: Housing and doors have a
dip base coating and a
powder-coating finish
Door lock two-way key
DIN 43668-C35)
Weight with central rack approx. 45 kg

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Wall-mounting case
Wandgehäuse WG1 WG1 - Front view
- Frontansicht Cross-section
Schnitt A - BA - B
(mm)
A
600
0XX0000-0XX00
CP xxx
500
RUN
STOP
400
300
SICAM RTU
200
100
b
c
0
B d
0 0
100 200 300 mm 100 200 300 mm
a Central rack
b Power supply terminal unit SVA
c Mounting plate
d Cable entry (option)
suc208f
Fig. 2-3 Example of the design of a SICAM eRTU in a wall-mounting case

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.2 Racks
2.2.1 UR1/UR2 Racks
UR1 rack The UR1/UR2 racks serve for accommodating the individual modules of
the SICAM eRTU. The communication between the modules is done via
the backplane bus. Via this bus they are also connected with the power
supply module. In addition, the racks are equipped with a K bus.
Rack with 18 slots
Separable
Connection
between
M and
P-bus connector
190
290
module
rack
K-bus connector
Chassis
for
ground
connection 465
482.5 (approx. 19")
Plastic parts Cover panels for bus connector

(serve e.g. as guide pieces when (unoccupied slots
swinging the modules into position) serve for covering)
SUC086f
Fig. 2-4 Design and dimensions of the UR1 rack
The UR1 rack with 18 slots is suitable both for fixed mounting and for
swing-frame mounting. Its dimensions correspond to the 19" standard
format.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.2 Racks
UR2 rack The UR2 rack with 9 slots is suitable for small-system assemblies.
Rack with 9 slots
Plastic parts
Separable (serve e.g. as guide pieces when
connection swinging the modules into position)
between
M and
module
190
290
rack
Cover panels for bus connector

(unoccupied slots
Chassis serve for covering)
for
ground 240
257,5
connection
suc087f
Fig. 2-5 UR2 rack
Separable The racks are supplied with a separable electrical connection between
connection the internal reference potential M of the modules and the rack. Behind
this connection, there is an RC network (6.8 nF/10 MΩ) for ungrounded
mounting.
Assembly The full-length bus systems make it possible to equip the racks without
any assembly rules. The only exceptions are:
• The PS power supply module. It must be plugged at the very left of
the rack into slots 1-3.
• The IM (Interface Modules) for rack connection must be plugged in at
the very right of the rack, if required.
Power supply The modules which are plugged into the rack are supplied with the
necessary operating voltages by the PS power supply module via the
backplane PCB. The connection is made via the backplane connectors.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
I/O bus The I/O bus (P bus) is a parallel backplane bus which is designed for
(P Bus) high-speed exchange of I/O signals. Each rack has a P bus. The time-
critical access to the process data of the signal modules is handled via
the P bus.
Communications The communications bus (K bus) is a serial backplane bus which is

bus (K bus) designed for high-speed exchange of large data volumes parallel to the
I/O signals. The K bus is necessary for all SICAM eRTU modules. The
standard SIMATIC input/output modules do not use the K bus.
2.2.2 Technical data
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the UR1/UR2 racks
UR1 UR2
Dimensions and weight Dimensions 482.5 mm × 290 mm × 27.5 mm 257.5 mm × 290 mm × 27.5 mm
(without modules) [W × H × D]
Weight 3 kg 1.5 kg
Features Number of slots 18 9
Bus systems Full-length K bus and P bus Full-length K bus and P bus

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.3 Power Supply
2.3 Power Supply
2.3.1 PS Modules
The PS power supply module supplies the internal supply voltages (5 V

DC, 24 V DC) of the SICAM eRTU by way of the backplane bus. Both
output voltages are monitored. Upon failure of one of these voltages, the
power supply module reports a fault to the CPU and activates the
corresponding LED indicator at the front panel (see Figure 2-6).
There are power supply modules for the following input voltage ranges
available:
24 V / 48 V / 60 V DC
110 to 250 V DC / 120 to 230 V AC Note:
Note:
The PS power supply module does not provide any load voltages for
modules.
Properties The input voltage is isolated. Thus either P(+) or P(−) can be grounded.
The outputs are short-circuit proof.
The inrush current is limited according to NAMUR Recommendation,
Part 1, dated December 1990.
On AC power supply modules, input and output are safely isolated
acc. to IEC 61131-2.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Front view of the PS

module PS 20A DC 48/20 Fixing screws
1 2 3
s
INTF Status and fault indications
BATT1F
BATT2F
BAF
DC5V
DC24V
FMR button
FMR
(Failure Message Reset)
Standby switch
Snap-on mechanism for cover
BATT 1 BATT 2
Battery compartment
(The SICAM eRTU does not
need any backup batteries)
2 BATT
OFF Switch BATT INDIC
1 BATT
Blanking plate
Designation
with
AC variant Guide for terminal block
L1 L+
N
3-pin connector
L- for power supply
PE PE
Plug coding
Fixing screws
SUC017f
Fig. 2-6 Front view of the PS power supply module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.3 Power Supply
Status and fault The LED indicators of all PS modules have the same meanings:
indications
Table 2-3 LED indicators of the PS power supply module
LED Colour Signification

INTF on red Internal PS fault
BATT1F red Back-up battery 1 fault
BATT2F red Back-up battery 2 fault
BAF red Battery voltage fault at backplane bus

(insufficient)
DC5V green 5 V DC output voltage lies within the tolerance

limits.
DC24V green 24 V DC output voltage lies within the

tolerance limits.
Back-up battery The power supply modules have a battery compartment which can
accommodate two back-up batteries.
Note:
The SICAM eRTU does not require any retentive data in order to restart
after a mains failure, i. e. it is not necessary to insert back-up batteries.
The maximum back-up time depends on the load on the back-up battery.
With two batteries inserted and a battery capacity of 60 % of the nominal
capacity, the following back-up times are reached:
Imax ≤ 200 µA back-up time approx. 250 days
Imax ≤ 4 mA back-up time approx. 12.5 days
The maximum back-up current is 4 mA.
The back-up batteries are standard AA type lithium batteries with a
nominal voltage of 3.6 V and a nominal capacity of 2 Ah.
2.3.2 Battery Monitoring
Switch positions of the BATT INDIC switch:

If you want to monitor only one back-up battery, set the switch to the
1BATT position.
If you want to monitor two back-up batteries, set the switch to the
2BATT position. Technical Specifications

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.3.3 Technical Data
The following table details the technical data of the PS power supply
module.
The power supply module must be protected by a 10 A mcb.
For further details on the environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3.
Table 2-4 Technical specifications of the PS power supply module
PS
6EP8090-0*A00
Dimensions and weight Dimensions [W × H × D] 75 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
Weight 1.5 kg
Voltage supply Rated voltage Urated DC 24 V / 48 V / 60 V or

DC 110 to 250 V / AC 120 to 230 V
Supply voltage range 19.2 to 71 V or

88 to 288 V
Admissible ripple of the voltage supply 3.6 VSS
Maximum power consumption 165 W

Environmental conditions Ambient air temperature 0 to +60 °C (from > 60 °C, reduction of the
during uninterrupted duty output power by 2.5 %/K)
During transportation / storage –40 °C to +70 °C
Climate IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3,

no condensation
MTBF for uninterrupted duty at 80 % of 100,000 hours

rated load and an average temperature of
40 °C
Electromagnetic Electrical isolation Input and output voltages

compatibility
Isolation test voltage
• between input and output • 2.5 kVeff
• between input and ground • 2.5 kVeff
• between output and ground • 500 Veff
Emitted interference Radio interference level EN 55022, Class B
Output Output current at
• DC 5 V • 20 A, short-circuit proof
• DC 24 V • 1 A, short-circuit proof
Residual ripple (DC 5 V) 50 mV
Mains buffering time

• at rated load • 20 ms
• at 50 % of rated load • 50 ms
Indications, interrupts, Status / fault indications 4 red and 2 green LEDs
diagnostics

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.4 CPU (Central Processing Unit)
2.4.1 CPU Modules
The openness of the SICAM eRTU design is enhanced by the use of

CPUs with memory cards. The station size and the customer-specific
functions which are implemented determine the computing power
requirements to be met by the CPUs.
For the SICAM eRTU, CPU modules with different performance
characteristics are available:
CPU 412-1 (96 kbytes; 0.2 µs)
CPU 412-2 (144 kbytes; 0.2 µs)
CPU 414-2 (256 kbytes; 0.1 µs)
CPU 414-3 (768 kbytes; 0.1 µs)
CPU 416-2 (1.6 Mbytes; 0.08 µs)
CPU 416-3 (3.2 Mbytes; 0.08 µs)
CPU 417-4 (4 Mbytes; 0.1 µs)
This makes it possible to provide the required system resources. Both
CPUs are fan-free, so that the maintenance time and cost is minimized
accordingly.
Note:
You will find more information on the modules in the Internet at
https://mall.ad.siemens.com/WW/guest

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Front view of the The operator and display elements are arranged in the same way on all
CPU module CPUs.
CPU 41x-x
X
6ES7 41x-xxxxx-0AB0
Status and fault indication

INTF
EXTF
BUS1F
BUS2F
not with CPU 412-1
Slot for Memory Card

FRCE
RUN
STOP
RUN
RUN-P STOP
RUN
Mode selector switch
STOP
MRES
P5V2 1 N.C.
N.C.
6
2 N.C.
MPI Interface 7 RxD / TxD-P
RxD / TxD-N 8
3
N.C. 4 RTS
9 M5V2
5
X1
N.C. = not occupied
MPI/DP
not with CPU 412-1
X2
DP
Plus Minus
EXT.-BATT.
5 ... 15 V DC Jack connector 2.5mm
Supply
external battery
suc205
Fig. 2-7 Front view of the CPU 412-1, 414-2 and 416-2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Each central processing unit provides shock-hazard protection through a

module enclosure, consisting of shell and cover (IP 20 degree of
protection and ESD protection).
Warning:
Do not remove the module enclosure: Touching the components might
cause electrostatic discharges which may eventually lead to destruction
of the module.
Status and fault The LED indicators of all CPUs have the same meanings:
indications
Table 2-5 LED indicators of the CPUs
LED Colour Meaning

INTF red Internal fault (on the CPU)
EXTF red External fault (outside the CPU)
BUS1F red Bus fault
BUS2F red Bus fault, not with CPU 412-1

FRCE yellow Force job
IFM1 red Fault on interface module 1
RUN green RUN status

STOP yellow STOP status
In addition to the indicators, each CPU is provided with test and

information functions which can be selected with STEP 7.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Status indicators The two LEDs RUN and STOP inform about the currently active CPU
operational status.
LED Status Meaning
RUN on CPU is in RUN status

STOP off
RUN off CPU is in STOP status. The user program is not executing.
STOP on Warm restart/reset are possible. If the STOP was caused by a
fault, the fault indicator (INTF or EXTF) is set additionally.
RUN flashing CPU is in the DEFECTIVE status. The LEDs INTF, EXTF and
STOP flashing FRCE flash additionally.
RUN flashing STOP status caused by test function

STOP on
RUN flashing A warm restart/reset was initiated. Depending on the length of

STOP on the OB, it may last one minute or longer until the warm restart/
reset is executed. If the CPU does not go into RUN status
even then, this may, e.g., be due to a system configuration
error.
RUN x General reset requested by CPU

STOP flashing
RUN x General reset running

STOP flashing
x = LED status is irrelevant

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Fault indicators The three LEDs INTF, EXTF and FRCE on the CPU front panel inform
you about faults, errors and particular events during the execution of the
application program..
LED Status Meaning
INTF on An internal fault was detected (programming or

parameterization error)
EXTF on An external fault was detected (i.e. a fault whose cause is not
located on the CPU)
FRCE on A Force task is active
The two LEDs BUS1F and BUS2F indicate faults concerning the MPI/DP
and the PROFIBUS DP interface.
LED Status Meaning
BUS1F on A fault has been detected on the MPI/DP interface.

BUS2F x
BUS1F flashing One or more slaves on PROFIBUS DP interface 1 do not

BUS2F x respond.
BUS1F x A fault has been detected on the PROFIBUS DP interface 2.

BUS2F on
BUS1F x One or more slaves on PROFIBUS DP interface 2 do not

BUS2F flashing respond.
x = LED status is irrelevant
The CPUs 41x-3 have the LED IFM1F. This LED indicates faults
regarding the first module interface.
LED Status Meaning
IFM1F on A fault has been detected on module interface 1.
IFM1F flashing One or more slaves of the PROFIBUS DP interface module

plugged into module slot 1 do not respond.
Mode selector With the help of the mode selector switch, you can set the CPU to the
switch following operating modes:

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
RUN-PROGRAM
RUN
STOP
HARDWARE RESET.
The mode selector switch is designed as key switch. The meanings of its
different positions are explained in the table below.
Table 2-6 Switch positions of the mode selector switch

Position Purpose Comment
RUN-P On-line parameter The CPU executes the application program or is
modification idle. I/O access is possible. The key cannot be
removed in this position. With the help of the
programming device, programs can be:
• read out from the CPU (CPU → PG)
• downloaded to the CPU (PG → CPU).
RUN Normal operation The CPU executes the application program or is
idle. I/O access is possible. The key can be
removed in this position, so that no unauthorized
person can change the operating mode. With the
help of the programming device, programs can be
read out from the CPU (CPU → PG). The program
in the load memory cannot be modified in the RUN
operating mode! (See STEP 7 user manual)
STOP No operation or The CPU does not execute the application
program loading program. The digital I/O modules cannot be
accessed. The key can be removed in this position,
so that no unauthorized person can change the
operating mode. With the help of the programming
device, programs can be read out from the CPU
(CPU → PG) and/or downloaded to the CPU
(PG → CPU).
MRES Hardware reset Pushbutton position of the key switch for a

software-controlled reset of the CPU.
Note:
After having downloaded the configured data, please cause the SICAM
eRTU to start by switching the CPU off and then on again.
When you parameterize the CPU set Restart or Cold restart as a start-
up option. The Hot restart causes operating status STOP.
For further information on how to change the operational status, please

refer to SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 /1/.
For more information on the switch positions during commissioning and
operation of the SICAM eRTU, please refer to
SICAM eRTU, Mounting Instructions /17/.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
MPI interface X1 The MPI (Multi-Point-Interface) allows to connect up to 15 (Token Ring

bus) stations to the CPU without using any other modules with
networking capability. Only bus connectors or PG cables are needed for
connection. Devices which can be connected include e.g.:
Programming devices (PG/PC)
When communicating with PGs, a CPU can hold several online
connections simultaneously, one of which is reserved for a PG.
SICAM Diamond
OP/MP text display (optional)
Note:
For further details on how to modify default settings, please refer to:
SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 /1/
Supply via At the EXT.-BATT. jack of the CPU, you can apply a direct voltage
external battery ranging from 5 to 15 V for
backing up an application program which you have stored on a
DRAM.
holding data on the CPU as retentive, such as data blocks, flags,
timers, counters or the internal clock.
saving the fault image on the communications processor.
The maximum rated current is 5 mA.
Note:
The system concept of the SICAM eRTU has been designed to work
without batteries thus guaranteeing freedom from maintenance!
Data back-up using battery supply is optional and is a standard feature
of the standard SIMATIC modules.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Memory Cards The CPU is operated exclusively with memory cards in the SICAM eRTU.
Memory cards are used like floppy disks in a PC and guarantee high
flexibility:
• The operating system is booted from the memory card.
• User software and user data are exchanged via the memory card.
• User software and user data are not deleted in case of a mains failure.
Caution:
If the supply voltage of the SICAM eRTU fails during a write access to the
memory card, the entire contents of the memory card may be damaged
under adverse circumstances.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.4.2 Memory Card
Memory cards are retentive storage media. They are used for saving:
the application program blocks
station parameters which determine the behaviour of the SICAM
eRTU
parameters which determine the behaviour of the function modules.
the configuration and parameterization of the STEP 7 project
If you order a memory card separately (e.g. as a spare part), you must
load the application program and the parameters into the memory card
with a PG or PC prior to commissioning.
SUC059f
Fig. 2-8 Memory card
Note:
The memory card incorporates a FLASH EPROM. It does not require any
voltage for storing its contents, i.e. the information contained on it will not
be deleted when you remove the memory card from the CPU or when
you operate your SICAM eRTU without back-up (i.e. without back-up
battery in the power supply module or without an external back-up
voltage being applied at the EXT.-BATT. jack of the CPU).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
CPU Modules The CPUs comply with the CE standard and can be used in the
environment defined there.
Table 2-7 Technical specifications of the CPUs 412-2 and 414-2
CPU 412-2 CPU 414-2

Dimensions and weight Dimension [W × H × D] 50 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
Weight appr. 720 g
Supply voltage Nominal value DC 24 V
Power consumption Typ./max. power consumption 1.5/1.6 A

DC 5 V
Max. power consumption DC 24 V max 150 mA per interface
Typ. power loss 7.5 W
Load memory Integrated 256 Kbyte RAM
Extensible memory card 64 Mbyte RAM / 64 Mbyte Flash EPROM
Performance characteristics Program/data memory 72/72 Kbyte 128/128 Kbyte
Command execution times per 0.2 µs 0.1 µs

binary command
Marker 4096 8192
Counter 256 256
Times 256 256
Environmental conditions Fanless operation yes
Degree of protection IP 20
Ambient air temperature 0 °C to 60 °C
during uninterrupted duty

Climate IEC 60721 Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no
condensation
Electromagnetic Interference immunity EN 50082-2

compatibility
Emitted interference Radio interference acc. to Limit class A (industrial environment)

EN 55022
Interfaces MPI-Interface 9-pole sub D female connector
Transmission rate 187.5 kbit/s
Signal level RS485
Voltage immunity 0.5 kV
Indications Function and status indications LEDs

Control element Key switch

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
I/O address space The I/O address space determines the maximum number of possible
inputs/outputs:
I/O address space requirements
8 digital inputs/outputs: 1 Byte
1 analog input/output: 2 Byte
Memory card The following table lists the technical specifications of the memory card.
Table 2-8 Technical specifications of the memory card

Features FLASH Card
Dimensions [W x H x D] 7.5 mm x 57 mm x 87 mm
Weight approx. 35 g
EMC protection Given by construction features
Memory capacity 256 kByte to 16 MByte
Note:
The memory capacity corresponds to the physical memory capacity.
After formatting, 80 % of the memory capacity are available for storing
data and programs.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.5 MCP Communications Assembly
Features An MCP assembly consists of an MCP communications processor which

can be expanded with up to 4 expansion modules. The user-specific
combinations of an MCP assembly are described in Chapter 1.3.2.
The MCP assembly performs the following functions:
Connection of bay devices via:
RS232 (6 interfaces)
fibre-optic cables (24 interfaces)
RS422/RS485 (6 interfaces).
MCP XC2 XC2 MCP XF6

0XX0000-0XX00
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
XF6
0XX0000-0XX00
0XX0000-0XX00 0XX0000-0XX00
X 2 X 2 X 2 X 2 X 2 X 2 X 2 X 2
X 3 4 X 3 4 X X 3 4 X 3 4 X X 3 4 X 3 4
3 4 3 4
6MD1010-0BA00
CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA10
CP xxx 6MD1010-0BA00
CP xxx P
INTF INTF
EXTF EXTF
LOAD LOAD
FAULT1 FAULT1 FAULT1 FAULT1
TXD1 TXD1 TXD1 TXD1
RXD1 RXD1 RXD1 RXD1
FAULT2 FAULT2
TXD2 FAULT2 FAULT2 TXD2
RXD2 TXD2 TXD2 RXD2
RXD2 RXD2 RUN T1 T1 T1 T1
RUN
STOP STOP
R1 R1 R1 R1
RESET RESET
T2 T2 T2 T2
R2 R2 R2 R2
T3 T3 T3 T3
SYNC SYNC
R3 R3 R3 R3
T4 T4 T4 T4
R4 R4 R4 R4
X1 X1 X1 X1
T5 T5 T5 T5
R5 R5 R5 R5
T6 T6 T6 T6
R6 R6 R6 R6
X2
X2 X2 X2
MCP +2 x XC2 MCP + 4 x XF6

SUC137f
Fig. 2-9 Examples of maximum configurations of MCP assemblies

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Connection to higher-level control centres via

RS422/RS485 (6 interfaces with IEC 60870-5-101).
X21 (6 interfaces with IEC 60870-5-101).
Communication with substations via:
RS422/RS485 (6 interfaces).
MCP
0XX0000-0XX00
XC2
X 2 X 2
X 3 4 X 3 4
6MD1010-0BA00
CP xxx
INTF
EXTF
LOAD
FAULT1 FAULT1
TXD1 TXD1
RXD1 RXD1
FAULT2
TXD2 FAULT2
RXD2 TXD2
RUN RXD2
STOP
RESET
SYNC
X1 X1
X2 X2
MCP + 1 x XC2
suc136f
Fig. 2-10 MCP assembly for communication to higher-level control centres

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Synchronization, using one of the following time signal receivers

DCF77
GPS
IRIG-B
When the GPS time signal is used, channel 6 and the interface X1
(RS232) of the MCP communications processor are occupied
automatically when configuring is done with SICAM plusTOOLS.
Synchronization can also be done with a telegram.
Processing The controller of the MCP communications processor handles the central
principle management functions for communication between the SICAM eRTU on
the one hand and the connected bay devices, substations, and higher-
level control centres on the other hand.
The communications processor provides two serial interfaces which can
be parameterized optionally as RS232 or RS422/RS485. If you need
more connections, you can use the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules
in addition.
2.5.1 MCP Communications Processor
The MCP communications processor accommodates the controller. It is

connected to both the P bus and the K bus via the backplane bus
connector. With the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules (if applicable),
the MCP communications processor communicates via a lateral
connector.
The communications processor has a 2-pin connector for connecting a
time signal receiver. It can act both as clock master and as clock slave.
The MCP software is responsible for
protocol and information conversion
clock synchronization of the devices
general interrogation of the devices
the startup procedure of all connected devices.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Dongle The MCP module carries on its back a dongle to prevent illicit copying of
the software. For plugging and unplugging the dongle, the module must
be removed.
Depending on the authorized software, 8 dongles are available: The
following options for combination of the transmission protocols can be
supplied either with or without CFC functionality.
Dongle for all permissible protocols - comprises the protocols of all
dongles listed below
Dongle for the standard protocols
IEC 60870-5-101 Master/Slave,
IEC 60870-5-103,
SINAUT 8-FW Slave,
DNP V3.0 Master/Slave,
TELEGYR 800 Slave and
TELEGYR 8979 Slave
Dongle for third-party protocols and standard protocols
IEC 60870-5-101 Master,
IEC 60870-5-103 and
DNP V3.0 Master
Dongle for the protocols
IEC 60870-5-104 Slave,
IEC 60870-5-101 Master/Slave,
IEC 60870-5-103,
SINAUT 8-FW Slave,
DNP V3.0 Master/Slave,
TELEGYR 800 Slave and
TELEGYR 8979 Slave
Note:
Order information about the different dongle variants is given in
SICAM eRTU/RTU, Planning and Design /16/.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Front view of the

MCP MCP
X X 2
3 4
6MD1010-0BA00
LED functions
INTF Internal MCP fault
EXTF External fault
LOAD Downloading
FAULT1 Fault 1
TXD1 Transmit data X1 interface
RXD1 Receive data
FAULT2 Fault 2
RXD2 Receive data
RUN Application program running
STOP Application program stopped
RESET
Synchronization 2 Ext. Synchronization (-)

input 1 Ext. Synchronization (+)
SYNC
X1 interface
X1
Cover
X2 interface
X2
SUC088f
Fig. 2-11 Front view of the MCP communications processor

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Enclosure The MCP communications processor provides shock-hazard protection

through a module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an
enclosure cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection).
Controller Controller type

QUICC 68360 by Motorola
Clock frequency
25 MHz
internal interfaces
6 interfaces (channel 1 to 6), which are connected to the internal
interface bus (S bus).
Boot EPROM
Flash EPROM Memory type 512k*8
Memory capacity 512 kByte,
Bus width 8 Bit
The boot EPROM contains the basic firmware which is required for
initializing the controller and for downloading the firmware to the program
memory.
Program memory Memory type 29F040,

4 EPROMs:
Memory capacity 0.5 MByte each,
Bus width 32 Bit
2 Flash EPROMs: Memory type 29F040,
Memory capacity 0.5 MByte each,
Bus width 16 Bit
The memory modules are wired in, i.e. the memory capacity is pre-
determined by the manufacturer.
Data memory Memory type 512k*8

4 SRAMs:
Memory capacity 2 MByte,
Bus width 32 Bit
The memory modules are wired in, i.e. it is not possible to modify the
memory capacity once the modules have been delivered to the customer.
Bus connector The MCP communications processor is equipped with two 5-row
backplane bus connectors for connection to the K bus and the P bus.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Connector for MCP A connector at the right side of the MCP communications processor
assembly serves for connecting the XC2 and/or XF6 expansion module (see
Chapter 2.5.4 and Chapter 2.5.5). The Sbus and Xbus connection
between the communications processor and the expansion modules is
realized independently of the Pbus and the Kbus.
S bus Via the S bus, the external interfaces of the XC2 and XF6 expansion
modules are connected to one of the 6 channels of the communications
processor controller. Which external interface is to communicate with
which channel of the controller is determined during the hardware
configuration of the MCP assembly combinations. For details on how to
proceed, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System
SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.
X bus Via the X bus, the communications processor controller handles the
control of the serial multiplexers of the MCP, XC2 and XF6 modules.
Status and fault On the front panel of the MCP communications processor, there are 11
indications light-emitting diodes for status and fault indications of the module.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 2-9 LED indicators of the MCP
LED Colour Meaning

INTF red Internal fault (on the MCP)
EXTF red External fault (outside the MCP)
LOAD yellow Downloading
FAULT1 red Fault 1
TXD1 green Transmit data X1 interface
RXD1 green Receive data
FAULT2 red Fault 2

RUN green Application program running
STOP yellow Application program stopped
LED patterns During the CPU start-up, the following LED patterns are visible:
during start-up
LED Status Meaning
INTF on Reset, hardware initialization

EXTF on
LOAD off
FL1 on
TxD1 on
RxD1 on
FL2 on
TxD2 on
RxD2 on
RUN on
STOP on
INTF on LED check

EXTF on
LOAD on
FL1 on
TxD1 on
RxD1 on
FL2 on
TxD2 on
RxD2 on
RUN on
STOP on

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
LED Status Meaning
INTF on Start of the boot system

EXTF off
LOAD off
FL1 off
TxD1 on
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP off
INTF on RAM check, duration approx. 5 s for every

EXTF off 512 kbytes
LOAD off
FL1 off
TxD1 on
RxD1 flashing (0.5 Hz)
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP off
INTF on RAM check o.k.

EXTF off
LOAD off
FL1 off
TxD1 on
RxD1 on
FL2 on
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP off
INTF off MCP is in STOP status, start-up is complete.

EXTF off
LOAD off
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
LED patterns While the firmware is being downloaded, the following LED patterns are
during firmware visible on the MCP communications processor:
loading
LED Status Meaning
INTF off MCP waiting for download start

EXTF off
LOAD flashing (0.5 Hz)
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on
INTF off Receiving data

EXTF off
LOAD flashing (2 Hz)
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on
INTF off Installation

EXTF off
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Loading the While the configuration data (system data) are being loaded, the LOAD
system data LED of the MCP communications processor shines continuously.
LED Status Meaning
INTF off MCP waiting for download start

EXTF off
LOAD flashing (0.5 Hz)
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on
INTF off Receiving data

EXTF off
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on
INTF off Installation

EXTF off
FL1 off
TxD1 off
RxD1 off
FL2 off
TxD2 off
RxD2 off
RUN off
STOP on
Fault indicators The TxD1, .., RxD2 LEDs are used for issuing fault codes. In case of a
fault, contact your system service technician or the after-sales service.
Tell him exactly which of these LEDs are shining.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Reset With the help of the reset pushbutton, the MCP communications
processor can be reset. The pushbutton is not used during normal
operation, but serves as a tool for fault diagnostics. In order to exclude
unintentional resets, the pushbutton is recessed and can only be pressed
using a pointed object.
The reset pushbutton is pressed when downloading the MCP firmware.
For more detailed information, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Mounting
Instructions /17/.
Clock The 2-pin synchronization input at the front panel serves for receiving an
synchronization external time signal for clock synchronization. As signal transmitter,
either DCF77, GPS or IRIG-B can be used.
Interfaces Two 25-pin interfaces at the front panel of the module serve for
X1 / X2 connecting the lines to bay devices / substations, or to a higher-level
control centre.
X1 and X2 can be parameterized as RS232 or RS422/RS485 interfaces.
The pins which are not used for operation as RS232 interface must
remain unconnected.
Reason: In addition to the RS232 signals, RS422/RS485 drivers are
implemented on the interface signals, so that data can also be
transmitted with the RS422/RS485 signal levels as an alternative (see
Table 2-10).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.5.2 25-Pin RS232 Interface
X1 or X2 (see Figure 2-11) can be parameterized as RS232 interface.

The following table shows the pin assignment of the socket connector:
Table 2-10 Pin assignment of the RS232 interface
Interface Pin Signal DIN Pin Signal DIN
25 * * 13 * *
24 TSTout (T) 12 * *
23 * * 11 * *
22 CI (M3) 10 * *
21 * * 9 * *
13
25
12 DTR (S1.2) DCD (M5)
24 20 8
11
23
10 19 * * 7 GND (E2)
22
9
21 18 * 6 DSR (M)*
8
20
7 RST (T4) CTS (M2)
19 17 5
6
18
5 16 * 4 RTS (S2)
17
4
16 15 TSTin (T2) 3 RxD (D2)
3
15
2 * * TxD (D)
14 14 2
1
1
* On these pins, RS422/RS485 drivers are implemented, do not connect!
The outputs of the 25-pin RS232 interface are switched to a high-

resistance state after startup. If they are not configured, they will remain
in this high-resistance state.
Line lengths The data transmission rate depends on the length of the line which is
connected. According to the V.28 recommendation, the maximum line
length is 15 m.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.5.3 25-Pin RS422/RS485 Interface
The RS422/RS485 interface supplies signals for synchronous data

transmission according to X.21 as well. The RS422/RS485 interface can
be parameterized in such a way that also half-duplex mode according to
RS485 is possible.
The pins which are not used for operation as RS422/RS485 interface
must remain unconnected.
Reason: In addition to the RS422/RS485 signals, RS232 drivers are
implemented on the interface signals, so that data transmission can be
realized also with the RS232 signal levels as an alternative (see Table 2-
11).
The outputs of the RS422/RS485 interface are switched to a high-

resistance state after startup. They are activated by the software of the
module and are switched again to a high-resistance state, if necessary.
Terminating In order to enable also bus operation in the RS422/RS485 operating

resistor mode, each of the two signal lines is provided with a pull-up and a pull-
down resistor which are active during RS485 operation.
Pullup / pulldown
resistors which can be
MCP, can be connected via
Sermux register
5V MCP 5 V IED 5 V IED IED 5 V
1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ

R_A
Transmit/Receive A
Terminating resistor at the
Terminating 1. first and the last station
resistor normally 100-120 Ω
(minimum 54 Ω)
Transmit/Receive B
R_B
1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ
mcp01.cdr
Fig. 2-12 Configuration of the terminating resistors

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The maximum line length depends on the transmission rate (for details,
please refer to DIN 19245, Volume 1).
The necessary terminating resistor is calculated using the following
formula:
1 1 1
------ =  -------- + ---------------------- R1 = 1.5 kΩ
Z L  Ra R1 + R2
R2 = 1.5 kΩ
1
Ra = ---------------------------- Z L = surge impedance of cable
1 1
------- – ----------------------
Z L R1 + R2
R1
1, 5 kΩ
Ra
R2
ZL
1, 5 kΩ
mcp02.cdr
Fig. 2-13 Determination of the terminating resistor
The terminating resistor has to be provided for in the cable connector!

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 2-11 Pin assignment of the RS422/RS485 interface
Interface Pin Signal Pin Signal
25 S_A 13 T_B
24 * 12 R_A
23 S_B 11 R_B†
22 * 10 I_A
13
25
12 21 C_A 9 I_B
24
11
23 * *
10 20 8
22
9
21 19 C_B 7 *
8
20
7 18 6 *
19
6
18 * *
5 17 5
17
4
16 16 4 *
3
15
2 15 * 3 *
14
1
14 T_A 2 *
* On these pins, RS232 drivers are implemented.

† For operation as RS422 interface, only pin 11 to pin 14 are used
For operation as RS485 interface, only pin 11 to pin 12 are used.
Line lengths/ The transmission rate depends on the length of the line which is
transmission rates connected.
Table 2-12 Line lengths/transmission rates
Transmission rate [kbps] Line length [m]

9,6 1000
19,2 500

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.5.4 XC2 Expansion Module
Front view of XC2

XC2
X X2
3 4
6MD1010-0BA10
LED functions
FAULT1 Fault 1
X1 interface
TXD1 Transmit data
RXD1 Receive data
FAULT2 Fault 2
RXD2 Receive data
X1 interface
X1
Cover
X2 interface
X2
SUC089f
Fig. 2-14 Front view of the XC2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Enclosure The XC2 expansion module provides shock-hazard protection through a

module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure
cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection).
Bus connector The XC2 expansion module does not have an S7/M7 bus interface of its
own. It uses the backplane bus only for the supply voltage and the slot
address.
Female connector Within the MCP assembly, the connection of the XC2 expansion module
for MCP assembly to the MCP communications processor or to another XC2 or an XF6 is
realized with the help of plug-and-socket connectors located at the
module sides.
Status and fault On the front panel, there are 6 light-emitting diodes which inform about
indications the module status.
Table 2-13 LED indicators of the XC2
LED Colour Meaning

FAULT1 red Fault 1

FAULT2 red Fault 2
Interfaces Two 25-pin interfaces at the front panel of the module serve for
X1 / X2 connecting the lines to bay devices or to higher-level control centres.
Both the X1 and the X2 interface can be parameterized as RS232 or
RS422/RS485 interfaces (see Page 71ff).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.5.5 XF6 Expansion Module
Front view of the

XF6
X 2
3 4
6MD1010-0BA20
CP xxx
Cover
T1 Transmit 1
Interface 1
R1 Receive 1
T2 Transmit 2
Interface 2
R2 Receive 2
T3 Transmit 3
Interface 3
R3 Receive 3
T4 Transmit 4
Interface 4
R4 Receive 4
T5 Transmit 5
Interface 5
R5 Receive 5
T6 Transmit 6
Interface 6
R6 Receive 6
SUC090f
Fig. 2-15 Front view of the XF 6

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Enclosure The expansion module provides shock-hazard protection through a

module enclosure consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure
cover (IP 20 degree of protection and ESD protection).
Bus connector The XF6 expansion module does not have an S7/M7 bus interface of its
own. It uses the backplane bus only for the supply voltage and the slot
address.
Connector for Within the MCP assembly, the connection of the XF6 expansion module
MCP assembly to the MCP communications processor or to an XC2 or XF6 is realized
with the help of plug-and-socket connectors located at the module sides.
Interfaces Six fibre-optic interfaces at the front panel of the module serve for
X1 to X6 connecting bay devices. The wavelength is 820 nm.
Socket For each fibre-optic link, one connector pair consisting of transmitter and
receiver is provided. The cables are connected using ST connectors.
The connectors are locked with bayonet joints.
The connectors have a downward inclination, so that the admissible
bending radii can be complied with.
Line lengths Table 2-14 shows the admissible line lengths for the different types of
fibre-optic cables.
.
Table 2-14 Admissible line lengths
Fibre Length
Glass 1,500 m
PCF 500 m
Plastic 3m

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Modules The MCP communications processor and its XC2 and XF6 expansion
modules comply with the CE standard and can be used in the
environment defined there.
Table 2-15 Technical specifications of the MCP communications processor and its expansion modules
MCP XC2 XF6

6MD1010- 6MD1010- 6MD1010-
0BA00 /CC 0BA10 0BA20
Dimensions and Weight Dimensions [W × H× D] 25 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
Weight 870 g 800 g 670 g
Ratings Rated voltage 5 V DC ± 0,25 V
Max. power consumption 1A 0.5 A 0.3 A
Power loss 5W 2.5 W 1.5 W
Features Processor QUICC 68360 of − −

Motorola
Boot-EPROM capacity 128 kbyte − −

Program memory capacity 4 × 512 kbyte − −
(EPROM, 32 bit)
2 × 512 KByte
(EPROM, 16 bit)
Data memory capacity 4 × 512 KByte − −
(SRAM)
Synchronization input “0” input signal level +0 V to +1 V − −

“1” input signal level +4 V to 5 V − −
Input current 6.5 mA to 12 mA − −
(input level 1)
Delay 0 → 1 3 ms (typical) − −
Delay 1 → 0 3 ms (typical) − −
Interface Transmission rate 50 bit/s to 115.2 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s
Signal level RS232 or RS232 or −

RS422/RS485 RS422/RS485
(X.21) (X.21)
Connector ISO 2110 (25-pin) ST
Environmental conditions Ambient air temperature during 0 °C to +60 °C

uninterrupted duty
During transport / storage −40 °C to +70 °C
Climate IEC 60721 Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation
MTBF 100 000 hours

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 2-15 Technical specifications of the MCP communications processor and its expansion modules
MCP XC2 XF6

6MD1010- 6MD1010- 6MD1010-
0BA00 /CC 0BA10 0BA20
Electromagnetic Electrical isolation Input and output voltages
compatibility
Isolation test voltage between 2.5 kVeff, 50 Hz, 1 min or 3.5 kV DC −
process inputs and electronics
(acc. to IEC 60255-5)
Rated voltage for determining 250 V DC −

the clearances and creepage (overvoltage category /
distances pollution degree III/2)
(acc. to DIN VDE 0110)
Surge voltage max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 µs −

acc to IEC 60255-5,
test category III
Electrical fast transient (burst) Klasse 3: −

EN 61000-4-4 2 kV with coupling damp
IEC 61000-4-4
Surge immunity Class 3: −
EN 61000-4-5 2 kV asymmetrical,
IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV symmetrical
Conducted disturbances Class 3: −

induced by radio frequency 10 Vrms
fields
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-6
Radiated RF-EM field Class 3: −

EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
Radiated EM field from
digital radio telephones
ENV 50204
Appendix to IEC 61000-4-3
(under discussion)
Emitted interference Radio interference level EN 55022 Class B
Indications, Interrupts, Status / fault indications 5 red, 2 red and −

Diagnostics 1 yellow and 4 green LEDs
5 green LEDs
When configuring and establishing connections via fibre optic cables,

please observe the following values:

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 2-16 Technical specifications of the fiber optic (FO) cables
6XV8100- 6XV8100- 6XV8100-

0BB41/51-... 0BC41/51-... 0EA41/51-...
Outdoor cable Indoor cable Indoor cable
(glass) (glass) (PCF)
Connector type BFOC connectors on both sides /

BFOC connector – F-SMA connector
Minimum bending radius

• during installation 200 mm 80 mm 80 mm
• during operation 150 mm 50 mm 50 mm
Maximum tensile strain

• during installation 1600 N 200 N 270 N
• during operation 1100 N 130 N 90 N
Diameter core/cladding 62.5/125 µm 50/125 µm 200/230 µm
Diameter of the first 250 µm 500 µm

coating
Wavelength 850 nm
Max. line length 1,500 m 500 m
Numerical aperture 0.27 0.2 0.36

Attenuation coefficient α ≤ 3.5 dB/km ≤ 3.0 dB/km 6 dB/km
Bandwidth–distance ≥ 400 MHz*km ≥ 200 MHz*km ≥ 17 MHz*km

product

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.6 IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack
The IM interface modules serve for connecting the backplane bus of the
central controller to that of the expansion racks. One interface module
consists of:
the send IM in the central controller
the receive IM in the expansion rack
the connecting line and
the terminator.
Both the send and the receive IM have two front interfaces each, which
serve for establishing the connecting lines to the partner modules. For
connecting a maximum of 4 expansion units to the central controller, the
following types of connection are available:
Up to 4 expansion racks in series using a separate interface of the
interface module for each line
Each expansion rack via a separate interface module
One expansion rack per line
Combination of the above variants.
Caution:
The different IM types are designed for certain maximum overall line
lengths, which must be complied with under any circumstances (see
Chapter 2.6.1 and Chapter 2.6.3).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2.6.1 IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 Interface Modules
The IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 interface modules (send/receive IM) can only be

used for establishing local links (up to 5 m overall line length per line).
Send module The IM 460-0 is plugged into the central controller - always into the last
IM 460-0 slot (18 in the UR1 rack or 9 in the UR2 rack) - as send IM.
IM Receive The IM 461-0 is plugged into the last slot of the expansion rack as receive
module 461-0 IM (X1 front connector) and send IM (X2 front connector, for serial
connection of the expansion racks). With the help of a coding switch, the
number of the expansion rack is set on this module.
Status and fault On the front panel of the IM 460-0 / 461-0, there are respectively 3 and 2
indications light-emitting diodes for status and fault indications of the module.
The display elements of the send IM have the following meanings:
LED Status Meaning
EXTF on External fault: line 1 or 2 is disturbed (missing connection plug,

wire break)
C1 on Line 1 (via X1 front plug) is OK
C1 flashing One module has not yet completed the initialization run.
C2 on Line 2 (via X2 front plug) is OK
C2 flashing One module has not yet completed the initialization run.
The indicator elements of the receive IM have the following meaning:
LED Status Signification
INTF on Internal fault if:

• one rack number > 21 or = 0 was set,
• you have changed the rack number in an energized status
EXTF on External fault if:

• Line disturbed, e.g. if the terminating resistor is not plugged,
• one module has not yet completed the initialization run,
• or if the central device is switched off.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Terminator On the last expansion rack of a line, the connecting line must be
terminated properly. For that purpose, a terminator is plugged into the X2
front connector of the receive IM of that expansion rack.
Connecting cables For connecting the individual interface modules, preassembled cables in
different standard lengths are available (see SICAM eRTU/RTU,
Planning and Design /16/).
External battery This female connector can be used to connect an external battery (5 V to
supply 15 V) or a central back-up voltage supply when the power supply module
in the rack is exchanged. Mind the mounting depth in the cabinet or wall-
mounting case when choosing the connector (if necessary, use a bent
connector).
As the SICAM eRTU system requires a backup battery only in the PS20A
power supply module of the central rack, this female connector can
remain unused.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Front view of the

Send IM Receive IM
IM 460-0 / IM 461-0
interface modules IM 460-0 IM 461-0
X X
6ES7460-0AA00 6ES7461-0AA00
LED function:
EXTF INTF Internal IM fault (inadmissible rack No.)
C1 EXTF External fault (e.g. terminator missing)
C2 Line 1/2 (connection) okay
RACK 0 2 Coding switch
Jack connector
EXT.-BATT. 2.5 mm Ø
External
battery
supply
5 ... 15 V DC
Positive Negative
Connector for connecting cable

from the upstream interface module
Connector for line 1
X1 X1
Connector for connecting cable

to the downstream interface module
or to the terminator
Connector for line 2
X2 X2
SUC016f
Fig. 2-16 Front view of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 interface modules

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 2-17 Technical specifications of the IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 interface modules
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
Dimensions and weight Dimensions (W × H × D) 25 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
Weight 600 g 610 g
Power consumption Power consumption 110 mA 260 mA
Power loss 0.7 W 1.45 W
Environmental conditions Isolation test 500 Veff 500 Veff
Interfaces Front connector functions 2 line outputs 1 line input

1 line output
Max. line length 5m 5m
Table 2-18 Technical specifications of the IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 interface modules
IM 460-3 IM 461-3
Dimensions and weight Dimensions (W × H × D) 25 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
Weight 630 g 620 g

Power consumption Power consumption 1550 mA 620 mA
Power loss 7.75 W 3.1 W
Environmental conditions Isolation test 500 Veff 500 Veff
Interfaces Front connector functions 2 line outputs 1 line input

1 line output
Max. line length 102 m 102 m
2.6.3 IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 Interface Modules
The IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 interface modules (send/receive module) are

used for establishing remote links (up to 102 m overall line length per
line). It is important for you to know the exact line length and to indicate
this variable when parameterizing the interface module.
Any other regulations, properties and technical data apply according to
Chapter 2.6.1 and Chapter 2.6.2.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Input / Output Modules 3
Overview This chapter describes the SICAM input/output modules which fulfil the
specific requirements of telecontrol systems.
Contents 3.1 Module Design 90
3.2 DI Digital Input Modules 92
3.3 AI Analogue Input 100
3.4 CO Command Output Module 109
3.5 CR Command Release Module 119
3.6 Status and Diagnostic Indications 132

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3 Input / Output Modules
3.1 Module Design
Requirements Resolution 1 ms
Voltage immunity 2.5 kV
Input/output voltage 24 / 48 / 60 / 125 V
Enclosure The modules offer shock-hazard protection through a module enclosure

consisting of an enclosure shell and an enclosure cover (IP 20 degree of
protection and ESD protection).
Warning
It is not allowed to remove the module enclosure!
The modules must not be mounted or commissioned without the module
enclosure!
Front side All function elements which are necessary for operation, mounting and
service are arranged at the front panel.
Input/output modules have a recessed 48-pin connector. In this recess,
the front connector can be hung into a bearing, plugged in and screwed
down.
Two screws are provided for fixing the modules to the rack.
Front connector The front connectors are available in the following designs:
Crimp contacts
Screw-type contacts
Spring-loaded terminals
The connection unit allows to connect flexible conductors with conductor
cross-sections ranging from 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2. The number of
conductors which can be stowed in the available cable space depends
on the diameter of the conductors used.
In general, the following rules are applicable:
36 conductors with an outside diameter of 3.0 mm.
46 conductors with an outside diameter of 2.5 mm.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.1 Module Design
c
d
e
f
d
h
l
k Enclosure
n a Module enclosure
p b Ventilation slots
r Front side
c Thread for front connector
d Module designation and fixture
e Status/fault indications
f Signal status indications
g Multipoint connector (48-pin)
n Bearing for front connector
Rear
i Bus connector
Front connector
k Enclosure (optionally with screw-type contacts,
crimp contacts or spring-loaded terminals)
l Coding elements
m Fixing screw for front connector
n Labelling strip
p Front cover (hinged)
r Cable entry
SUC018f
Fig. 3-1 Mechanical components of an input/output module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.2 DI Digital Input Modules
The DI digital input modules are suitable for acquiring and processing
switch positions and other digital signals.
The digital input modules convert the levels of external binary process
signals to the internal signal level of the SICAM eRTU substation
controller and process them.
The modules are characterized especially by the following features and
functions:
Spontaneous event capturing
The events which are captured depending on the parameterized
processing type are written chronologically into the event buffer (EPE)
with a resolution of 1 ms. The DI module issues a hardware interrupt
(HWI) which causes the CPU to collect the data. The event buffer can
hold 200 events.
Cyclic state capturing
Keeping a process input image (PII). This process image can be read
directly by the CPU.
Parameterizable processing types
Single-point indication
Fleeting indication
Double-point indication
Metered value
Bitstrings
Transformer tap indication
Safe acquisition of the signal states
Comparing the input voltage with the signaling-circuit voltage
guarantees that the "0" and the "1" signal level are recognized reliably
over the entire input voltage range. The "1" signal state is recognized
when at least 80 % of the signaling-circuit voltage have been reached.
Sensor for recognizing and monitoring the signaling-circuit voltage
Diagnostic indication, suppression of misinformation

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
DI terminal
connection PIN No. of the
Input multipoint connector
diagram 1 Input
WL1 DI
WL2 2 monitoring
(withdrawal loop)
Abbreviations:
3
USx Signaling-circuit IND0 I0.0 4
voltage (serves as I0.1 5
IND1
reference voltage) I0.2 6
IND2
UCPx Common potential I0.3 7
IND3
of the 8 inputs I0.4 8
IND4
INDx Indication source I0.5 9
IND5
Ix.x Signal input of the IND6 I0.6 10
module I0.7 11
IND7
- + US0 12
=
UCP0 13
14
IND8 I1.0 15
IND9 I1.1 16
IND10 I1.2 17
IND11 I1.3 18
IND12 I1.4 19
IND13 I1.5 20
IND14 I1.6 21
IND15 I1.7 22
- + US1 23
=
UCP1 24
25
IND16 I2.0 26
IND17 I2.1 27
IND18 I2.2 28
IND19 I2.3 29
IND20 I2.4 30
IND21 I2.5 31
IND22 I2.6 32
IND23 I2.7 33
- + US2 34
=
UCP2 35
36
IND24 I3.0 37
IND25 I3.1 38
IND26 I3.2 39
IND27 I3.3 40
IND28 I3.4 41
IND29 I3.5 42
IND30 I3.6 43
IND31 I3.7 44
- + US3 45
=
UCP3 46
47 Potential
48 isolation 2.5 kV
SUC003f
Fig. 3-2 Terminal connection diagram of the digital input module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.2.1 Input Wiring
Each one of the inputs I0.0 to I3.7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The
applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage for each input
group (I0.x to I3.x). This reference voltage is directly proportional to the
applied signaling-circuit voltage (US0 to US3). If the input voltage present
at inputs I0.0 to I3.7 exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, the
binary status 1 is detected.
100
“1” signal
Signal level
80
“0” signal
Signal profile
0.25 ms
Sampling time
0
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 t (ms)
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
Digital filter (shift register) Parameterized filter time
(here: 1 ms)
Status change to "1" recognized:

process change is processed
Absolute time of change is calculated
back to the beginning of the filter time.
SUC027
Fig. 3-3 Principle of operation of the input filter
This adaptive behaviour of the input level threshold ensures a reliable

recognition of the "0" and the "1" signal level over the entire input voltage
range.
4
0 Analog Cycle
I0.0
multi-
Internal DI data bus
1 Digital
2 plexer filter
.
3 Test/
.
4 control
. PIN No. of the
multipoint connector 5 logics
6
11
7
I0.7
Comparator
13 Uref ASIC
UCP0
12 Potential
US0 5V isolation
DC 2.5 kV
Voltage
Terminals
divider Hybrid
of the front
connector
SUC140
Fig. 3-4 Input circuit of the DI module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.2.2 Electrical Isolation
The internal electronics of the DI module is isolated against the signaling

circuits by optocoupler.
3.2.3 Circuit Design
Since there are four separate input groups on the DI module, it can be
adapted to different process requirements when being connected.
The circuit designs described below should be considered as solution
examples.
Signaling-circuit For the voltage supply of the signaling contacts, you can use:
voltage
an existing station or substation battery on the process side
the PS power supply module mounted in the switchgear cabinet.
Fusing of the We recommend fusing the signaling-circuit voltage applied to the DI

signaling circuit module and to the signaling contacts on the process side using appliance
miniature circuit breakers. Miniature circuit breakers with a rated current
of 1 A for every four digital input modules have proved to be efficient in
practical operation.
Grounding of the Thanks to the isolated design of the input groups (including the inputs for
signaling voltage the signaling-circuit voltage) and the electrical isolation on the digital
input module, the latter allows all possibilities of grounding the station
voltage:
Ungrounded station voltage / signaling-circuit voltage
Negative potential grounded
Positive potential grounded.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The DI 6MD1021 digital input modules comply with the CE standard and
can be used in the environment defined there.
Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the DI modules
DI 32 DI 32
6MD1021-0AA00 6MD1021-0BA00
Weight (without front connector) Approx. 700 g
Power consumption From backplane bus Max. 500 mA

From signaling-circuit voltage US Max. 75 mA
(all inputs active)
Power loss of the module Typ. 3 W

(50 % of the inputs active)


no condensation
MTBF for uninterrupted duty 100,000 hours

at an average temperature of 40 °C

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the DI modules (Forts.)
DI 32 DI 32
6MD1021-0AA00 6MD1021-0BA00
Electromagnetic Isolation test voltage between 2.5 kVeff, 50 Hz, 1 min or 3.5 kV DC
compatibility process inputs and electronics
(acc. to IEC 60255-5)
Rated voltage for determining the 250 V DC

clearances and creepage distances (overvoltage category/
(acc. to DIN VDE 0110) pollution degree III/2)
Surge voltage Max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 µs

acc. to IEC 60255-5, test category
III
Electrical fast transient (burst) Class 3:

EN 61000-4-4 2 kV with coupling clamp
IEC 61000-4-4
Surge immunity Class 3:

EN 61000-4-5 2 kV asymmetrical,
IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV symmetrical
Conducted disturbances induced by Class 3:

radio frequency fields 10 Vrms
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-6
Radiated RF-EM field Class 3:

EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
ENV 50204
(under discussion
Electrostatic discharge/ESD Class 3:

EN 61000-4-2 6 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge
IEC 61000-4-2
Emitted interference Radio disturbances Limit class A (industrial environment)

acc. to EN 55011 and
IEC CISPR 11

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
DI 32 DI 32
6MD1021-0AA00 6MD1021-0BA00
Digital inputs Number of inputs 32
Number of groups with common 4

potential
Electrical isolation between the Yes

groups
Isolation test voltage between the 2.5 kVeff, 3.5 kV DC

groups
Admissible potential difference 250 V DC

between the groups
Indication processing Single-point indications, fleeting indications,

double-point indications, bit patterns, transformer
taps; entire bytes can be combined
Metered value processing 16 metered values
Time stamping Resolution 1 ms

accuracy ± 2 ms,
depending on synchronization cycle
Indications, interrupts, Signal status indications 32 green LEDs

diagnostics
Status / fault indications 2 red and 1 green LEDs
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostic functions Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and

software, memory check
Input voltage Rated input voltage 24 to 60 V DC 110 to 125 V DC
Admissible range 19.2 to 72 V DC 83 to 156 V DC
Input resistance 48 kΩ 440 kΩ
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Rated value for “1” signal Approx. 80 % to 125 % Approx. 90 % to 125 %

of US of US
Rated value for “0” signal −US to approx. 80 % −US to approx. 90 %

of US of US
Line length Max. 500 m Max. 1,000 m

(conductor capacity (conductor capacity
up to 50 nF) * up to 50 nF) *
Conductor cross-sections ≤ 1.5 mm2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
DI 32 DI 32
6MD1021-0AA00 6MD1021-0BA00
Filter times, Hardware input filters 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ms
acquisition times (parameterizable)
Trigger delay, smoothing time 0 to 25.5 s, in increments of 100 ms

(parameterizable)
Counting frequency for metered Max. 20 Hz

values
Pulse width > 20 ms, depending on hardware filter time
Update of process input image < 20 ms plus hardware filter time

plus CPU cycle time
Writing 1 event into event buffer < 40 ms plus hardware filter time
Writing 32 events into event buffer < 400 ms plus hardware filter time
* Note that the configurable hardware filter time is limited by the line length
Table 3-2 Hardware filter time vs line length
Line length Filter time
up to 50 m minimal 1 ms

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.3 AI Analogue Input
Analog input modules convert analog signals from the process to digital
values for internal processing within the module and the SICAM eRTU
substation controller.
Voltage and current sensors, thermocouples, resistors and resistance
thermometers figure among the sensors which can be connected.
Characteristic features of analog input modules are:
Parameterizable measuring ranges,
unipolar or bipolar, for current or voltage monitoring (see Chapter
3.3.6, Technical Data)
Analog-to-digital conversion
according to sigma/delta method (interference voltage suppression
for 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 16 2/3 Hz)
Cyclic state acquisition
Cyclic conversion of all parameterized measured value channels and
writing the measured values into the process input image (PII). This
process image can be read directly by the CPU.
Spontaneous event capturing
The events recognized by threshold processing are tagged with a
time stamp and are written chronologically into the event buffer (EPE)
with a resolution of 1 ms. The AI module issues a hardware interrupt
(HWI) which causes the CPU to collect the data (incl. time stamp).
The event buffer can hold 100 events.
Automatic self-calibration
Signaling in case of failure or incorrigible deviations
Encoding with 12 bits plus sign
Precision
± 0.25 % or ± 0.15 % (referred to the end value).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Connection
diagram AI-32 PIN No. of the
Abbreviations: WL1 1 Input AI-32
WL2 2 monitoring
MSVx Measured value (withdrawal loop)
3
source E0 4
I0N - =+
Ex Measured value - =+ E1 5
I1N
=
input - =+ E2 6
MSV2
=
GND Common I3N - +

=
E3 7
=
potential GND
8
GND
9
- + E4 10
MSV4 =
- +
=
I5 11
MSV5 =
- +
=
E6 12
MSV6 =
- +
=
E7 13
I7N =
14
- + E8 15
MSV8 =
- +
=
I9 16
I9N =
- + E10 17
I10N
=
=
- + E11 18
I11N
=
=
GND
GND 19
20
- + E12 21
MSV12 =
- + E13 22
+
=
MSV13 =
- +
=
E14 23
MSV14 =
- + E15 24
MSV15
=
=
25
- + E16 26 -
MSV16 =
- + E17 27
MSV17
=
=
- + E18 28 Analog
MSV18
=
= to-digital
- + E19 29 converter
MSV19
=
=
GND
GND
30
31
- + E20 32
MSV20 =
- + E21 33
MSV21
=
=
- + E22 34
MSV22
=
=
- + E23 35
MSV23
=
=
36
- + E24 37
MSV24 =
- +
=
E25 38
MSV25 =
- + E26 39 Solid-state
MSV26
=
=
- + E27 40 Multiplexer
MSV27
=
=
GND
GND 41 Potential
42 isolation
- + E28 43 2.5 kV
MSV28 =
- +
=
E29 44
MSV29 =
- + E30 45
MSV30
=
=
- + E31 46
MSV31
=
=
47
48
SUC004f
Fig. 3-5 Terminal connection diagram of the AI-32 6MD1031 analog input
module (solid-state)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Connection
diagram AI-16
PIN No. of the
Abbreviations: Input multipoint connector
MSVx Measured value WL1 1 Input AI-16
source WL2 2 monitoring
3 (withdrawal loop)
Ex Measured value - + I0P 4
input =
I0N I0N 5
GND Common - + I1P 6
potential =
I1N MSV1 7
- + I2P 8
=
MSV2 I2N 9
- + I3P 10
=
I3N MSV3 11
12
13
14
- + I4P 15
=
MSV4 I4N 16
- + I5P 17
=
MSV5 I5N 18
- + I6P 19
=
MSV6 I6N 20
- + I7P 21
=
I7N MSV7 22
+
23
24
25
-
=
+ I8P 26 -
MSV8 I8N 27
- + I9P 28 Analog
= to-digital
I9N MSV9 29 converter
- + I10P 30
=
I10N MSV10 31
- + I11P 32
=
I11N MSV11 33
34
35
36
- + I12P 37
=
MSV12 I12N 38 Relay
- + I13P 39 Multiplexer
=
MSV13 I13N 40
- + I14P 41
=
MSV14 I14N 42 Potential
- + I15P 43 isolation
= 2.5 kV
MSV15 I15N 44
45
46
47
48
SUC005f
Fig. 3-6 Connection diagram AI-16 6MD1032 analog input module (relay)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
AI modules are optionally available with:

Current inputs
The current inputs are provided with highly accurate measuring
shunts. Due to the low-resistance measuring circuit termination, they
are less susceptible to interferences.
Voltage inputs
They are high-resistance and therefore susceptible to interferences.
The input type of the AI modules can be chosen independently of the
magnitude to be measured, its conversion is handled by an interposed
transducer.
3.3.1 Input Circuit of the AI-32 Module
The following figure shows the input circuit principle of the AI-32. It has 32
isolated analog inputs with a common potential.
Up
Input
4
E0
Σ−∆−
Un ADC
PGA
PIN No. of the
multipoint connector ...
Reference
Voltage
Up
GND
8 Un
Terminals Shunt filter CMOS Impedance Analog Potential

of the front on current Multiplexer converter to-digital isolation
Socket inputs converter 2.5 kV
SUC143
Fig. 3-7 Input circuit principle of the AI-32 module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.3.2 Input Circuit of the AI-16 Module
The following figure shows the input circuit principle of the

AI-16 module. It has 16 isolated analog inputs, each of which is
connected to common potential via a 2-pole relay.
Input 4
I0P
5 Σ−∆−
I0N ADC
PGA
PIN No. of the
multipoint connector
Reference
... Voltage
Up
GND
Un
Terminals Shunt filter Relay Impedance Analog Potential

of the front on current Multiplexer converter to-digital isolation
Socket inputs converter 2.5 kV
SUC144
Fig. 3-8 Input circuit principle of the AI-16 module
3.3.3 Overvoltage Protection
The inputs of the analog input modules are protected with suppressor
diodes and RC networks against overvoltages and transients.
3.3.4 Multiplexer
AI-32 The AI-32 analog input module is equipped with a solid-state multiplexer.
This concept allows a compact design, so that 32 analog inputs can be
accommodated on one module.
AI-16 The AI-16 analog input module is optimized for higher electrical isolation
and interference immunity between the input circuits. It is equipped with
16 2-pole relays. Each input circuit is switched through differentially to the
A/D converter.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.3.5 A/D converter
The A/D converter function element is designed according to the principle

of the sigma/delta method. Filter times, resolution and amplifier are
parameterizable. The conversion time for a measured value (12 bits plus
sign) is approx. 30 ms with a parameterized interference voltage
suppression for 50 Hz.
Automatic The analog input modules calibrate themselves. For that purpose, the
calibration modules are provided with highly accurate, low-drift reference voltage
sources. In order to reduce the temperature drift, the modules
automatically perform a zero and a full-scale adjustment after being
switched on and then at regular intervals.
Parameterizable The A/D converter has a parameterizable pre-amplifier. It makes it

amplifier possible to adapt different nominal input ranges to the ideal operating
range of the converter, thus guaranteeing maximum conversion
accuracy.
The AI 6MD1031-0AA00 and AI 6MD1032-0AA00 analog input modules

comply with the CE standard and can be used in the environment defined
there.
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the AI modules
AI-32 AI-16
6MD1031-0AA00 6MD1032-0AA00
Weight (without front connector) Approx. 720 g Approx. 720 g
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.5 W

(with unconnected inputs)
Power loss of the measuring shunts 3.2 W additionally 1.6 W additionally

at IE = 20 mA over all inputs


no condensation


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the AI modules (Forts.)
AI-32 AI-16
6MD1031-0AA00 6MD1032-0AA00
(acc. to IEC 60255-5)

clearances and creepage distances (overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2)
Surge voltage (acc. to Max. 5 kV, 1.2/50 µs

IEC 60255-5, test category III)

EN 61000-4-4 max. 2 kV with coupling clamp
IEC 61000-4-4

EN 61000-4-5 max. 2 kV asymmetrical,
IEC 61000-4-5 max. 1 kV symmetrical
Conducted disturbances induced by Class 3:

radio frequency fields 10 Vrms
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-6

EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
ENV 50204
(under discussion)

IEC 61000-4-2
Emitted interference Radio disturbances acc. to Limit class A (industrial environment)

EN 55011and IEC CISPR 11

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
AI-32 AI-16
6MD1031-0AA00 6MD1032-0AA00
Analog inputs Number of inputs 32 with common 16, separated via relay
potential multiplexer
Analog-to-digital conversion Sigma/delta method
Resolution 12 bits + sign
Automatic zero adjustment Yes
Automatic measuring range Internally via thermostable reference signal

adjustment (full scale)
Accuracy ± 0.25 % ± 0.15 %

from 0 °C to 60 °C from 0 °C to 60 °C
Measured value processing Using thresholds acc. to VDEW recommendation

Cycle time (incl. int. calibration):
for 32 measured values with:
16 2/3 Hz 1645 ms −
50 Hz 1005 ms −
840 ms −
60 Hz
925 ms
16 2/3 Hz 845 ms 605 ms
50 Hz 525 ms 520 ms
60 Hz 440 ms
16 2/3 Hz 245 ms 265 ms
50 Hz 165 ms 185 ms
60 Hz 140 ms 160 ms
for 1 measured value with:
95 ms 95 ms
16 2/3 Hz 75 ms 75 ms
50 Hz 65 ms 65 ms
60 Hz
Time stamping Resolution 1 ms, accuracy ± 2 ms,

Electrical isolation between the No Yes, relays

measuring circuits
Isolation test voltage between the − 500 V DC

measuring circuits
Admissible potential difference 0V 125 V DC

between the measuring circuits
Interference voltage suppression:
common mode 60 Hz ≥ 90 dB ≥ 100 dB
differential mode 50 Hz ≥ 60 dB ≥ 60 dB
Line length, shielded Max. 200 m
Conductor cross-sections ≤ 1.5 mm2 ≤ 1.5 mm2
Indications, interrupts, Status / fault indications 2 red and 1 green LEDs

diagnostics
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostic functions Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and

software, memory check

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
AI-32 AI-16
6MD1031-0AA00 6MD1032-0AA00
Current inputs Input areas ± 1 mA

(define possible measuring ranges ± 20 mA
for the AI module as a whole) ± 24 mA
Measuring ranges
parameterizable for each input
input area ± 1 mA 0 to + 0.5 mA – 0.5 to + 0.5 mA*
0 to + 1.0 mA – 1.0 to + 1.0 mA*

0 to + 5.0 mA – 5.0 to + 5.0 mA*
0 to + 10.0 mA – 10.0 to + 10.0 mA*
0 to + 20.0 mA – 20.0 to + 20.0 mA*

0 to + 3.0 mA – 3.0 to + 3.0 mA*
0 to + 6.0 mA – 6.0 to + 6.0 mA*
0 to + 12.0 mA – 12.0 to + 12.0 mA*
0 to + 24.0 mA – 24.0 to + 24.0 mA*
Input resistance > 250 Ω
Input voltage ± 7.2 V DC
Admissible peak voltage (t < 1 s) ± 10 V DC
Voltage inputs Input areas ±1V

(define possible measuring ranges ±6V
for the AI module as a whole) ± 10 V
Measuring ranges
parameterizable for each input:
input area ± 1 V 0 to + 0.5 V – 0.5 to + 0.5 V*
0 to + 1.0 V – 1.0 to + 1.0 V*
input area ± 6 V 0 to + 1.5 V – 1.5 to + 1.5 V*

0 to + 3.0 V – 3.0 to + 3.0 V*
0 to + 6.0 V – 6.0 to + 6.0 V*
input area ± 10 V 0 to + 1.25 V –1.25 to + 1.25 V*

0 to + 2.5 V – 2.5 to + 2.5 V*
0 to + 5.0 V – 5.0 to + 5.0 V*
0 to + 10.0 V – 10.0 to + 10.0 V*
Input resistance > 1 MΩ
Input voltage Max. ± 12 V DC
Admissible peak voltage (t < 1 s) Max. ± 20 V DC
* With a resolution of 11 bits plus sign.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.4 CO Command Output Module
Digital output modules convert the internal signal levels of the

SICAM eRTU substation controller to the external signal levels needed
for the process.
These modules are suitable for controlling contactors, small-power
motors, motor starters and lamps, among other things.
Characteristic features of command output modules CO are:
32 binary outputs (realized as 16 2-pole relay outputs)
One common potential for each contact of the 16 2-pole relays
Time-controlled output of:
single commands
double commands
Safe command output, by selecting between different operating modes:
Without external release and switching current check:
32 1-pole outputs
32 1½-pole outputs
16 2-pole outputs.
With external release and switching current check
(required by the function module CR, see Chapter 3.5):
32 1-pole outputs (corresponds to 1½-pole operation without CR)
32 1½-pole outputs
16 2-pole outputs (mode is possible, but not standard).
time-independent digital output
Digital output via PIO process output image with high isolation voltage
Bit pattern output, non-retentive in case of a voltage failure
Internal output safety
One-out-of-n monitoring of the outputs
Continuous readback of the output relay drivers

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
CO terminal
diagram Input multipoint connector
WL1 1 Input CO
Abbreviations: Load resistors WL2 2 monitoring
(e.g. interposing relay) 3 (withdrawal loop)
UIx Command voltage
Electrical isolation 2.5 kV

CMD0 O0.0 4
input
O0.1 5
RLCx Release contact CMD1
CMD2 O1.0 6
CMDx Command O1.1 7
CMD3
destination O2.0 8
CMD4
Ox Command output CMD5 O2.1 9
CMD6 O3.0 10
CMD7 O3.1 11
12
13
14
O4.0 15
CMD8
O4.1 16
CMD9
CMD10 O5.0 17
O5.1 18
CMD11
CMD12 O6.0 19
O6.1 20
CMD13
CMD14 O7.0 21
CMD15 O7.1 22
23
24
Relay control
25
CMD16 O8.0 26
O8.1 27
CMD17
CMD18 O9.0 28
O9.1 29
CMD19
CMD20 O10.0 30
O10.1 31
CMD21
CMD22 O11.0 32
CMD23 O11.1 33
RLC0 34 Release
RLC1 35
36
CMD24 O12.0 37
O12.1 38
CMD25
CMD26 O13.0 39
CMD27 O13.1 40
CMD28 O14.0 41
O14.1 42
CMD29
O15.0 43
CMD30
O15.1 44
CMD31
Si UI0 45 Selection/
L+ UI1 46 Switching thr.
Station/ +
substation - 47
battery L- 48 Up Un
Grounding (optional)
SUC006f
Fig. 3-9 Terminal connection diagram of the CO 6MD1022 command output

module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.4.1 Command Output on the CO Module
The following figure shows the command output circuit principle of the
CO module. It has 32 isolated output contacts. They are arranged in two
groups of 16, each of which has its own command output circuit.
The 2-pole outputs (16 single commands) are switched through via K20,
the 1-pole and 1 1/2-pole outputs (32 single commands) via K19. In
addition, the K22 release relay can be looped into the output circuit (for
details, see circuit examples in Chapter3.5.2).
The K17 and K18 selection relays ensure that the desired output Ox.0 or
Ox.1 of the 2-pole output is activated in case of 1-pole and 1 1/2-pole
outputs.
Connection
Terminals 34
RLC0 K22
CO internal
35 release
RLC1
45
UI0
46
UI1 K20
Switching throug
of the output
K19 voltage
PIN No. of the

multipoint connector
K18
Selection
K17 relay
4
O0.0 K1
5
O0.1
.. .. ..
. 43
. . Output relays
O15.0 K16
44
O15.1
SUC142f
Fig. 3-10 Principle of the command output circuit of the CO module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Unprotected digital The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the
output "unprotected digital output" operating mode. This operating mode is
characterized by the following features:
Several output relays can be controlled independently of each other
at the same time.
2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relays in the process
(depending on wiring)
The connection points of the UI0 and UI1 output voltages are
permanently switched through to the contacts of the output relays.
The release contact on the CO module is not used.
Process Cabinet or enclosure
O0.0 4 CO
+
+
- O0.1 5
-
Out-
put
relay
O15.0 43
+
+
- O15.1 44
-
Si Selection
UI0 45
Switching
Station/ L+
through
substation + E.g. to UI1 46
- other rack release
battery
P- RLC0 34
Grounding (optional) Potential
To other RLC1 35 isolation 2.5 kV
Modules
(on the same
fuse circuit)
SUC031
Fig. 3-11 Wiring in the digital output mode unprotected

(2-pole connection of the load disconnecting relays)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1-pole command The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "1-pole
output command output" operating mode. This operating mode is characterized
by the following features:
Only 1 command at a time is output.
1-pole activation of the load disconnecting relay in the process.
The release contact on the CO module is not used.

- + O0.0 4 CO
- + O0.1 5
Out-
put
- + O15.0 43 relay
- + O15.1 44
Si UI0 45 Selection
To other Switching
Station/ L+ Modules UI1 46 through
substation + E.g. to (on the same
release
+
- other rack fuse circuit)

battery RLC0 34
P- Wiring necessary if no suppressor
diodes at load disconnecting relay RLC1 35
Potential
isolation 2.5 kV
Grounding (optional)
SUC029
Fig. 3-12 Wiring in the "1-pole command output" operating mode
If the load disconnecting relays are activated without suppressor diodes

in this operating mode of the CO module, the internal suppressor diodes
of the CO module must be wired (via the RLC1 connection point).
The grounding of the command output voltage can be adapted to the
process requirements without any restrictions, since the outputs of the
CO modules are isolated.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1 1/2-pole The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "1 1/2-pole
command output command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-pole A"). This
operating mode is characterized by the following features:
1 1/2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relay in the process,
i.e. one coil side is applied to the command output voltage via the
output relay, while the other coil side is applied to the command
output voltage via the release contact on the CO module using the
common return line of all load disconnecting relays.
When not activated, the load disconnecting relay is de-energized by
the release contact.

- + O0.0 4 CO
- + O0.1 5
Out-
put
- + O15.0 43 relay
- + O15.1 44
Si Selection
UI0 45
L+ Switching
Station/ To other
UI1 46 through
+ Modules
substation
+
- E.g. to (on the same release

battery P- other rack fuse circuit) RLC0 34
-
RLC1 35
isolation 2.5 kV
SUC030
Fig. 3-13 Wiring in the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2-pole command The following figure shows the wiring of the CO module in the "2-pole
output command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-pole B"). This
operating mode is characterized by the following features:
2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relay in the process, i.e.
both coil sides are applied to the command output voltage via the
output relay and the switching-through element connected in series.
When not activated, the load disconnecting relay is de-energized.
The release contact is not used.
O0.0 4 CO
-
+
- O0.1 5
+
Out-
put
relay
O15.0 43
-
+
- O15.1 44
+
Si Selection
UI0 45
Switching
Station/ L+
through
substation + E.g. to UI1 46
- other rack release
battery
P- RLC0 34
To other RLC1 35 isolation 2.5 kV
Modules
(on the same
fuse circuit)
SUC031
Fig. 3-14 Wiring in the "2-pole command output" operating mode


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The CO digital output module complies with the CE standard and can be
used in the environment defined there.
Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the CO module
CO 32
6MD1022-0AA00
Dimensions and Dimensions [W × H × D] 25 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
weight
Weight (without front connector) Approx. 800 g

without output
From backplane bus Max. 600 mA

during command output (1 out of n)
From backplane bus Max. 75 mA
for each additional relay output
Power loss of the module Typ. 1.5 W

without output
Power loss of the module Typ. 3 W

during command output
Environmental No-fan operation Yes

conditions

Storage temperature − 40 °C to + 70 °C
Climate IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the CO module (Forts.)
CO 32
6MD1022-0AA00
compatibility process outputs and electronics
(acc. to IEC 60255-5)

clearances and creepage distances (overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2)


IEC 61000-4-4

Conducted disturbances induced Class 3:

by radio frequency fields 10 Vrms
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-6

EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
ENV 50204
(under discussion)

IEC 61000-4-2
Emitted interference Radio disturbances acc. to Limit class A (industrial environment)
EN 55011 and IEC CISPR 11
Digital outputs Number of relay outputs 32 1-pole or 16 2-pole

with common potential, normally open contacts
Separate switching through 1-pole or 2-pole

of the output voltage (determined by the operating mode)
Separate release contact 1-pole
Switching voltage of the relay 125 V DC ± 25 %

contacts
Operating modes Command output (bitstring) Persistent output
Command output Pulse output

output time 0 to 60 s, in increments of 10 ms
Indications, interrupts, Signal status indications 32 green LEDs (with 2-pole output, 2 LEDs per output
diagnostics circuit light up)
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostic functions Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and software,

memory check, 1-out-of-n monitoring

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the CO module (Forts.)
CO 32
6MD1022-0AA00
Max. switching DC control of purely resistive loads
current and or fully suppressed process relay
switching capacity (with external suppressor diode)
(total current of all Command output voltage AC [V] 24 48 60 110 125
output circuits) Continuous current AC [A] 5 5 5 5 5
Making capacity [W] 360 230 200 133 133
Breaking capacity [W] 100 65 55 50 50
Service life 0.5×106 1×106 1×106 1×106 1×106
(switching cycles with 50% of Irated)
DC control of purely inductive loads

or unsuppressed process relay
(LS/RS < 7 ms,
internal suppressor diodes of CO
module not connected)
Command output voltage AC [V] 24 48 60 110 125
Continuous current AC [A] 5 5 5 5 5
Breaking capacity [W] 60 30 27.5 25 25
Service life 0.3×106 0.5×106 0.5×106 0.5×106 0.5×106
AC control of purely resistive loads

(cos φ = 1)
Command output voltage ACn [V] 24 48 60 110 125
Service life 2×106 1×106 1×106 0.5×106 0.5×106
AC control of purely inductive loads

(cos φ = 0.4)
Service life 1×106 0.5×106 0.5×106 0.2×106 0.2×106
Line length, shielded Max. 200 m

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.5 CR Command Release Module
The CR command release module switches the output voltage in 2-pole

mode to the command output circuit, depending on the result of several
checks.
The functions on the CR module allow to distribute the command output
circuit to two separate modules, thus meeting very high demands as to
the safety of the command output.
In addition, eight binary inputs and eight relay outputs for acquisition and
control of process data are provided on each module.
Characteristic features of command release modules CR are:
Release control
Control of an external release relay to enhance the switching capacity
Electrical isolation check of the command output circuit
Impedance check of the command output circuit
(switching current check):
Measuring the actual value and comparing it to the scheduled value
High accuracy (± 2 %)
Tolerance band of the command output circuit +30 % / -20 %
Monitoring of the command output voltage
Monitoring of the command execution (reading back the output relays)
Monitoring of the command output time
Functional postprocessing of the process output, e.g. control and
monitoring of the command output
8 inputs for process and system tasks:
Spontaneous indication acquisition (single-point and fleeting
indication) with 1 ms real-time resolution
Parameterizable input filters (hardware and software filters)
Event buffer for 50 events
8 outputs for process and system tasks:
Isolated from command output and command release circuit
Command output via PIO process output image (time-independent) or
time-controlled command output via APA job buffer

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Standard diagnostic facilities:

LED indicators for the process image and the module status on the
front panel of the module
Local diagnostics with the programming device
Operational and status IDs (qualifiers) in the telegram

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
CR terminal
diagram 1 Input
WL1 CR
WL2 2 monitoring
Abbreviations:
3 (withdrawal loop)
RUCx Release contact I0.0 4
IND0
CMDx Command I0.1 5
IND1
destination I0.2 6
IND2
I0.3 7
INDx Indication source IND3
filter
I0.4 8
US Signaling-circuit IND4
I0.5 9
voltage IND5
I0.6 10
SCCx Switching current IND6
I0.7 11
check IND7
-
= + US 12
Ox.x Command output UCP 13
Ix Signal input -
= + 14
O0.0 15
UCP Commong
O0.1 16
potential of the CMD0
O0.2 17
Electrical isolation 2.5 kV

signal inputs
O1.0 18
O1.1 19
CMD1
O1.2 20
O2.0 21
CMD2 O2.1 22
O3.0 23
O3.1 24
Relay control
CMD3
25
O4.0 26
CMD4 O4.1 27
O4.2 28
O5.0 29
CMD5 O5.1 30
O5.2 31
O6.0 32
CMD6 O6.1 33
O7.0 34
O7.1 35
CMD7
36
L+ Si UBP 37
P- UBN 38
Release control
Station or 39
substation battery release
RUCP 40
Command output RUCN 41
voltage
42
SCCP1 43 Up Un
SCCN1 44
lation check
Wiring of the
SCCP 45
Switching

Potential
SCCN 46
SCCN
check
47
48
SUC007f
Fig. 3-15 Terminal connection diagram of the CR 6MD1023 command release

module

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.5.1 Command Release on the CR Module
Depending on the result of several checking criteria, the CR module

switches the output voltage in 2-pole mode to the command output circuit
via powerful contacts.
This circuit design offers several advantages:
The entire command output circuit including the CO digital output
module down to the command interposing relay is de-energized in idle
state.
Prior to command release, the entire command output circuit can be
checked (in de-energized state) for electrical isolation and short
circuits, interruption and connections in parallel (switching current
check).
The command output circuit is distributed to two independent
modules. This increases the command output considerably.
Monitoring of the The CR function module monitors the command output voltage prior to
output voltage command release. In case of an inadmissible deviation (< 17 V), the
command output voltage is not switched through and the command
release is aborted.
Check for The electrical isolation check detects electrical connections of the
electrical isolation command output circuit to interference voltages.
The following wiring faults and errors are detected:
Electrical connection between the command output circuit and the
output voltage
An isolated direct voltage (> 2 V) in the command output circuit.
If the command output circuit is looped over a CO module, the above-
mentioned electrical connections are detected between the CO and the
CR module, on the CO module or between the CO module and the
connected load disconnecting relay. In case of an inadmissible
connection of the output circuit, the command output voltage is not
switched through and the command release is aborted.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Switching current For the switching current check, the impedance of the command output
check circuit is measured and compared to the parameterized value.
The following wiring faults and errors are detected:
Short circuit between P and N release contacts
Interruption in the command output circuit
Connection of another load resistor or connection in parallel or in
series of additional resistors.
In case of an inadmissible impedance (tolerance +30 % / -20 %) of the
output circuit, the command output voltage is not switched through and
the command release is aborted.
Relay outputs The 8 relay outputs on the CR module are general-purpose digital
outputs. They are not blocked by additional hardware functions.
Of the 8 relay outputs, 4 are changeover contacts and 4 are normally
open contacts.
Possible applications include the control of:
cabinet light
alarm signaling systems.
Digital inputs 8 digital inputs for general process inputs are provided on the CR
module. Their design corresponds to that of the inputs on the
DI digital input module (see Chapter 3.2).
Each of the inputs I0 to I7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The applied
input voltage is compared to a reference voltage. This reference value is
directly proportional to the applied signaling-circuit voltage (US). If the
input voltage present at inputs I0 to I7) exceeds approx. 80 % of the
signaling voltage, binary state "1" is recognized.
Possible applications include:
door contact monitoring
general interrogation
check of the signal status and fault indications on the function
modules (LED tests)
fuse fault
transmission link errors (signal level errors).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
1½-pole command The following figure shows the wiring of the CR (and the CO) module in
output the "1 1/2-pole command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-
(positive potential pole A"). This operating mode facilitates:
connected)
1 1/2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relays in the process, i.e.
one coil side is applied to the command output voltage via the output
relays of the CO module, while the other coil side is applied to the
command output voltage via the release contacts on the CR module.
Prior to switching through the command output voltage, several checks
are performed (parameterizable):
monitoring of the command output voltage
electrical isolation check of the command output circuit
impedance check of the command output circuit (switching current
check).
When not activated, the load disconnecting relays are de-energized.
By distributing the command output circuit to two independent modules,
the safety of the command output is increased compared to direct output
via the CO module.

- + O0.0 4 CO
- + O0.1 5
Out-
put
relay
- + O15.0 43
- + O15.1 44
UI0 45 Selection
Switching
UI1 46 through
To other release
CO Modules RLC0 34
Potential
RLC1 35 isolation 2.5 kV
Wiring necessary if no suppressor

diodes at load disconnecting relay RUCP 40 CR
RUCN 41 Release
- + control
- + L+ Si UBP 37
P- UBN 38
Station/
SCCP1 43
substation
Electrical
battery SCCN1 44 Potential
check
SCCP 45 +
Switching
SCCN 46 - SCCN
SUC032
Fig. 3-16 Wiring of the CR module in the "1 1/2-pole command output"
operating mode (positive potential connected)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
If the load disconnecting relays are activated without suppressor diodes

in this operating mode of the CO module, the internal suppressor diodes
of the CO module must be wired (via the RLC1 connection point).
CR and CO modules are isolated.
1½-pole command As opposed to the 1 1/2-pole command output variant illustrated in Figure
output 3-16 , the negative potential is connected in the following figure (the only
(negative potential difference lies in the wiring of the P and N release contacts).
connected)
Note:
Please make sure that a correctly poled command output voltage is
applied at the CR module.

+ - O0.0 4 CO
+ - O0.1 5
Out-
put
relay
+ - O15.0 43
+ - O15.1 44
Selection
UI0 45 Switching
through
To other UI1 46
CO Modules release
RLC0 34
Potential
RLC1 35 isolation 2.5 kV
Wiring necessary if no suppressor

diodes at load disconnecting relay CR
RUCP 40 Release
control
RUCN 41
Si
- + L+ UBP 37
P- UBN 38
Station/
SCCP1 43
substation
Electrical
check
SCCP 45 +
Switching
SCCN 46 - SCCN
SUC139
operating mode (negative potential connected)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
2-pole command The following figure shows the wiring of the CR (and the CO) module in
output the "2-pole command output" operating mode (also referred to as "2-pole
B"). This operating mode facilitates:
2-pole activation of the load disconnecting relays in the process; when
not activated, the load disconnecting relays are de-energized.
Prior to switching through the command output voltage, several checks
are performed (parameterizable):
monitoring of the command output voltage
impedance check of the command output circuit (switching current
check).
By distributing the command output circuit to two independent modules,
the safety of the command output is increased compared to direct output
via the CO module.

O0.0 4 CO
+
+
- O0.1 5
Out-
put
relay
O15.0 43
+
+
- O15.1 44
Selection
UI0 45
Switching
through
UI1 46
release
To other RLC0 34
CO Modules Potential
RLC1 35
isolation 2.5 kV
RUCP 40 CR
RUCN 41
Release
- + control
Si
- + L+ UBP 37
P- UBN 38
Station/
SCCP1 43
substation Electrical
check
SCCP 45 +
Switching
SCCN 46 - SCCN
SUC033
Fig. 3-18 Wiring of the CR module in the "2-pole command output" operating
mode

CR and CO modules are isolated.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Connection of an The following figure shows the wiring of the CR module for command
external release output with an external release relay. This circuit variant is characterized
relay by the following features:
The electrical isolation check and the switching current check are also
available in the external command output circuit.
When not activated, both the external release relay and the load
disconnecting relays are de-energized.

- + O0.0 4 CO
- + O0.1 5
Out-
put
relay
- + O15.0 43
- + O15.1 44
Selection
UI0 45 Switching
To other
CO Modules through
UI1 46
Alternative Release
suppressor diode RLC0 34
Potential
RLC1 35
isolation 2.5 kV
External
release relay
+ RUCP 40 CR
RUCN 41 Release
- control
UBP 37
UBN 38
Si SCCP1 43
Electrical
Station/ SCCN1 44 Potential
check
- + substation
P- L+ SCCP 45 +
battery Switching
SCCN 46 - SCCN
SUC138
operating mode with external release relay
The switching capacity is increased to 5 A breaking current at 110 V DC.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The command release modules comply with the CE standard and can be
used in the environment defined there.
Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the CR modules
CR CR
6MD1023-0AA00 6MD1023-0BA00
Dimensions and Dimensions [W × H × D] 25 mm × 290 mm × 210 mm
weight
Weight Approx. 800 g
(without front connector)
Power From backplane bus
consumption • without command output •Max. 400 mA
• during command output •Max. 800 mA
From signaling-circuit voltage US Max. 15 mA
(all channels active)
Power loss of the module

• without command output •Typ. 2 W
• during command output •Typ. 4 W
Environmental No-fan operation Yes
conditions


Climate IEC 60721, Volume 3-3, Class 3K3, no condensation


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the CR modules (Forts.)
CR CR
6MD1023-0AA00 6MD1023-0BA00
(acc. to IEC 60255-5)

clearances and creepage (overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2)
distances


IEC 61000-4-4

Conducted disturbances induced Class 3:

by radio frequency fields 10 Vrms
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-6

EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
ENV 50204
(under discussion)

IEC 61000-4-2
Emitted Radio disturbances acc. to Limit class A (industrial environment)

interference EN 55011 and IEC CISPR 11
Inputs/outputs Number of release contacts 2 separate relays, changeover contacts

Number of command outputs 8 isolated contacts
(4 CO contacts and 4 NO contacts)
Number of digital inputs 8
Rated input voltage 24 to 60 V DC 110 to 125 V DC

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
CR CR
6MD1023-0AA00 6MD1023-0BA00
Digital outputs Switching voltage of the relay Max. 125 V DC ± 25 %
contacts
DC control of purely resistive loads
or fully suppressed process relay
(with external suppressor diode)
Max. switching current and
switching capacity
(total current of all output circuits):
Service life 0.5×106 1×106 1×106 1×106 1×106
DC control of purely inductive

loads or unsuppressed process
relay (LS/RS < 7 ms,
internal suppressor diodes of
CO module not connected )
switching capacity
Breaking capacity [W] 60 30 27.5 25 25
Service life 0.3×106 0.5×106 0.5×106 0.5×106 0.5×106
AC control of purely resistive loads

(cos φ = 1)
switching capacity
Service life 2×106 1×106 1×106 0.5×106 0.5×106
AC control of purely inductive loads

(cos φ = 0.4)
switching capacity
Service life 1×106 0.5×106 0.5×106 0.2×106 0.2×106
Digital output (bitstring output) Persistent output
Command output Pulse output

output time 0 to 60 s, in increments of 10 ms

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
CR CR
6MD1023-0AA00 6MD1023-0BA00
Command release Command release type Pulse output
Command release time Output time 0 to 60 s, in increments of 10 ms

• Measuring-circuit voltage •5 V ± 5 %, limited by hardware circuit
• Measuring range of the output •30 Ω to 50 kΩ, accuracy ± 2 Ω or ± 2 %
circuit
• Tolerance limits •Nominal value + 30 % / − 20 %
Digital inputs Rated input voltage 24 to 60 V DC 110 to 125 V DC
Admissible tolerances − 20 % to + 25 % ± 25 %
Rated value for “1” signal Approx. 80 % to Approx. 90 % to

+ 125 % of US + 125 % of US
Rated value for “0” signal − US to approx. 80 % − US to approx. 90 %

of US of US
Input filters (parameterizable) 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ms
Input resistance 48 kΩ 440 kΩ

Line length 500 m 1,000 m (conductor
(conductor capacity up to 50 nF) capacity up to 50 nF)
Indication processing Single-point and fleeting indications

Time stamping Resolution 1 ms, accuracy ± 2 ms,
Indications, Signal status indications

interrupts, • command release •1 green LED
diagnostics
• digital outputs •8 green LEDs
• digital inputs •8 green LEDs
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostic functions Watchdog, version identifier for hardware and software,

memory check

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
3.6 Status and Diagnostic Indications
On the SICAM I/O modules DI, AI, CO and CR there are two red and one
green LEDs for the indication of the operational status and of internal and
external faults.
The meaning of the LEDs is identical for all SICAM I/O modules of the
SICAM eRTU system and listed in the following table.
LED Status Meaning
INTF flashing Restarting. Parameters are transmitted from the CPU,

EXTF off e.g. after switching on the supply voltage.
on
RUN
INTF off Normal operational status:

EXTF off module is up to date and ready for operation
on
RUN
INTF on Internal fault:

EXTF off
on • Wrong parameters
RUN • Memory error
• Command output error (only CO, CR)
INTF off External fault:

EXTF on
on • Front connector missing
RUN • No signalling-circuit voltage (only DI)
• External fault inputs for metered values or
transformer taps (only DI)
• Wire break
(only AI, in the 4 to 20 mA measuring range)
• Measured value in overflow range (only AI)
INTF irrelevant Internal data exchange between CPU and I/O module:
EXTF irrelevant The RUN LED goes out when data are ready for
pulsing
RUN collection by the CPU and lights up again when the data
have been collected.
INTF off • Internal data exchange interrupted

EXTF off
off • No supply voltage
RUN
INTF on • Module resetting

EXTF off
off • Module does not start up
RUN

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Time Signal Receiver 4
This chapter describes the SICAM eRTU time signal receivers.
Contents 4.1 DCF77 Receiver 134
4.2 GPS Receiver 136
4.3 IRIG-B Signal 138

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
4 Time Signal Receiver
4.1 DCF77 Receiver
4.1.1 General
DCF77 time signal DCF77 time signals are broadcasted in the long-wave range from the
radio transmitter station Mainflingen near Frankfurt on the Main. The
transmitted signal covers a radius of 2,000 km, although unfavouable
geographic conditions may prevent reception even within a smaller
radius.
Features The DCF77 receiver compares the values it receives to an internally

simulated signal and stores the control variables in a fail-safe way, thus
providing the following functions:
Bridging a bad or interfered reception for up to 2 hours
Negligible receive jitter from second to second.
Design The DCF77 receiver is designed for mounting on DIN rails. The housing
is made of plastic, the antenna of aluminium.
Control voltage For the synchronization of the MCP communications processor, a control
voltage of 5 V is used.
Accuracy The system accuracy depends on the individual modules and

amounts to ±2 ms.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
4.1 DCF77 Receiver
Table 4-1 Technical specifications of the DCF77 time signal receiver, model Hopf 4465
DCF77
Dimensions Receiver (W × D × H) 65 mm × 130 mm × 105 mm
Indoor antenna (W × D × H) 310 mm × 130 mm × 45 mm
Outdoor antenna (W × D × H) 900 mm × 430 mm × 40 mm
Enclosure Indoor antenna Galvanized sheet steel
Outdoor antenna Anodized aluminium
Power supply Input voltage 24 V / 48 V DC*
Power consumption 2.5 W
Environmental conditions see Chapter 1.3.3
Input Socket for input signal BNC
Input sensitivity 40 µV
Control range 70 dB
Accuracy Time offset ± 2 ms
Indications, interrupts, Status indications 3 LEDs

diagnostics
Antenna cable Max. cable length 500 m
* For supply voltages > 48 V, you need an AC/DC or DC/DC converter.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
4.2 GPS Receiver
4.2.1 General
GPS time signal GPS (Global Positioning System) is a satellite-aided U.S. navigation
system. The system is based upon 24 satellites, which revolve around
the earth on different orbits at an altitude of 20,000 km broadcasting the
time of their own on-board clocks. This time signal can be used all over
the world.
Features Isolated antenna circuit

Parameterizable via serial interface
All outputs isolated
Accuracy The system accuracy depends on the individual modules and amounts to
±1 ms.
Design The GPS receiver is designed as snap-in module.
Note:
The GPS receiver Hopf Modell 6870 simulates a DCF77 receiver and
must therefore be connected as such to the SICAM eRTU, as well as
configured in SICAM plusTOOLS. Refer to the respective instructions for
the configuration of the receiver.
You can also connect to the SICAM eRTU a GPS receiver without
DCF77 simulation (e. g. Truetime). The receiver then occupies a serial
port (X1 of the MCPs) and one MCP channel.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
4.2 GPS Receiver
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the GPS time signal receiver, model Hopf 6870
GPS
Dimensions Receiver (W × D × H) 160 mm x 80 mm x 55 mm
Enclosure Material Weather-proof and splash-proof, made of

macrolon acc. to IP 65/DIN 40050
Weight 0.4 kg
Serial Port Shielded 2-conductor cable 2 x 0.5 mm2
Power supply Input voltage 24 to 48 V DC*

9 to 24 V AC
220 V AC
Power consumption 2.5 W

Input sensitivity -143 dB
Receive frequency 1.575.42 MHz

Accuracy Accuracy ± 2 ms
Back-up Maintenance-free back-up through 3 days

stand-by clock
Indications, interrupts, Status indications 3 LEDs

diagnostics
Antenna cable Max. cable length 15 m

with special cable 70 m;
with repeater 150 m
* For supply voltages > 48 V, you need an AC/DC or DC/DC converter.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
4.3 IRIG-B Signal
4.3.1 General
IRIG-B time signal IRIG-B is a normalized time signal on the basis of the satellite-aided
navigation system GPS. This time signal can be used all over the world.
Features The IRIG-B time signal contains no year.

The IRIG-B receiver from TrueTime needs at least four satellite time
signals.
Accuracy The system accuracy depends on the individual modules and amounts to
±2 ms.
Design The IRIG-B receiver is suitable for installation in a 19" rack.
Note:
The IRIG-B receiver XL-AK from TrueTime must be connected to the
SICAM eRTU and parameterized in SICAM plusTOOLS.
For details on configuring the receiver, please refer to the pertinent
documentation from TrueTime.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
4.3 IRIG-B Signal
Table 4-3 Technical data of the IRIG-B time signal receiver, TrueTime model XL-AK.
IRIG-B
Dimensions Receiver (W × D × H) 445 mm x 4318 mm x 2667 mm
Enclosure Material Weather-proof and splash-proof, made of

macrolon acc. to IP 65/DIN 40050
Weight 3.175 kg
Serial Port RS232 or RS485 9.6 kBit/s and 19.2 kBit/s
Power supply Input voltage 120 to 370 V DC

95 to 260 V AC
Power consumption <15 W

Input sensitivity high:TTL to 10 V DC

low: TTL
Receive frequency 1,575.42 MHz (L1 signal)
Accuracy Accuracy 10 us for UTC or ± 100 ns without SA*)
Back-up Battery lithium, 3.5 V 10 years service life
Indications, interrupts, Status indications 1 LED

diagnostics
Antenna cable Cable length Standard 15 m

possible up to 450 m
* SA = Selective availability

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
System Functions 5
This chapter gives information about system procedures and how they
are processed.
Contents 5.1 Interplay between the CPU and MCP 142
5.2 Change in Operating State of the CPU 145
5.3 Organization Blocks 147
5.4 Diagnostic Buffer 148
5.5 Status Indications 149
5.6 General Interrogation 153
5.7 Clock Synchronization 154

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
5.1 Interplay between the CPU and MCP
Communication of the SICAM eRTU with control centres, bay devices

and substations is handled by the MCP communications processor .
Communication with the I/O modules, SICAM Diamond and the
automation which has been configured with SICAM CFC, is handled by
the CPU.
MCP Tasks of the MCP in themonitoring device:

Passing indications, measured values and metered values from the
CPU to the control centres. These items of information can come from
the I/O modules or have been created in the CFC.
Passing indications, measured values and metered values from bay
devices/substations to the CPU for transmission to SICAM
Diamond.
devices/substations to the CPU for transmission to SICAM CFC.
devices/substations to the control centre.
Tasks of the MCP in thecontrol direction:

Reception of commands from the control centres and transmission to
the CPU for passing them to the command output modules
Reception of commands from the control centres and transmission to
bay devices/substations
Reception of results from the SICAM CFC links (via the CPU) and
transmission to bay devices/substations
Reception of the commands from the SICAM Diamond (via the CPU)
and transmission to bay devices/substations
General tasks:
Monitoring of the startup of the bay devices and substations
Connection via telecontrol, bay devices and substation
communication protocols
Managing the time signal for time synchronization
If command feedback is configured, this feedback is sent through the

system in opposite direction.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5.1 Interplay between the CPU and MCP
CPU Tasks of the CPU in themonitoring device:

Reception of indications, measured values and metered values of the
I/O modules and transmission to SICAM Diamond
I/O modules and transmission to SICAM CFC
I/O modules and transmission to MCP for passing to the control
centres
Transmission of results from the SICAM CFC links to the MCP for
passing to the control centres
Transmission of results from the SICAM CFC links to the
SICAM Diamond
bay devices/substations (via the MCP) and transmission to
SICAM Diamond
bay devices/substations (via the MCP) and transmission to
SICAM CFC
Transmission of status indications to SICAM Diamond
Tasks of the CPU in thecontrol direction:

Transmission of the commands received from MCP (control centre) to
the command output modules
Transmission of the commands received from SICAM Diamond to the
MCP for output to bay devices/substations
Transmission of the commands received from SICAM Diamond to the
command output modules
Transmission of the commands received from SICAM Diamond to
SICAM CFC
Transmission of the commands received from SICAM CFC to the
command output modules
Transmission of the commands received from SICAM CFC to the
MCP for output to bay devices/substations
If command feedback is configured, this feedback is sent through the

system in opposite direction.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
General tasks
Execution of user functions which were configured with SICAM CFC
such as signal links, command interlocking, control procedures, etc.)
Execution of the user programs created with SCL / AWL
Procedure of the operating system
The operating system control the SICAM eRTU, coordinates the
cyclic interrupts and hardware interrupts and monitors the user
program cycle and controls the K and P buses.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5.2 Change in Operating State of the CPU
5.2 Change in Operating State of the CPU
Processes in the CPU can cause a change in operating state.

Example: When the supply voltage of the RTU is switched on, the
operating states STOP (defined output state caused by an overall reset,
for example), STARTUP (initialize and set flags) and RUN (process user
program → operation) are run through.
Figure 5-1 and Table 5-1 show all transitions between operating states
and the cause of the change in state.
a s f
Power ON STOP RUN
d STARTUP
Power OFF
k j h ; l
Branch from any
operating state HALT
Change operating states via
Switching on the eRTU
Operator input or error
Test job from PG/PC
suc236.wmf
Fig. 5-1 CPU operating states

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
Table 5-1 Transitions between operating states and their causes
No. Transition in Cause Criterion

in operating state
Fig.
1 Power ON→STOP • Turn on power supply. --
2 STOP→STARTUP • Automatic: Turn on power supply. Operating mode switch

• Manual: Switch position: RUN or RUN-P,
• Communication job: from PG, for
example Parameter
3 STARTUP→STOP • Switch --
• Command from program
• Fault
example
4 STARTUP→RUN • End of startup Startup concluded without

errors
5 RUN→STOP • Switch --
• Fault
example
6/9 STARTUP/RUN → • Test job from PG/PC PG/PC connected and

HALT • Set halting point reported
7/10 HALT → • Test job from PG/PC PG/PC connected and

STARTUP/RUN • Set halting point reported
8 HALT→STOP • Switch --
• Fault
example
Note:
When you parameterize the startup behaviour after
POWER ON activate the optionrestart or cold start.
The hot restart causes operating status STOP.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5.3 Organization Blocks
5.3 Organization Blocks
Organization blocks (OB) control and optimize program processing in the

CPU. These blocks are the interface between operating system and user
program. Varying numbers of organization blocks are available in the
individual CPU modules of the SICAM eRTU.
The organization blocks are divided into 9 classes. The following table
gives you an overview.
Table 5-2 Organization blocks in the SICAM RTU
Class Start event OB No. Priority Priority

can be
changed
to
Free cycle End of last cycle or end of startup OB 1 1 (lowest) No
Time interrupts Date, time (e.g., repeat daily) 10 ... 17 2 2 ... 24
Delay interrupts Expiration of time started by user 20 ... 23 3 ... 6 2 ... 24

program
Cyclic interrupts Cyclic time clock pulse (10 ms ... 1 30 ... 38 7 ... 15 2 ... 24
min)
Hardware Hardware interrupt from DI32, AI32/ 40 ... 47 16 ... 23 2 ... 24

interrupts 16, CO32, CR
Multiprocessorin Reception of an interrupt from the 60 25 No

terrupt userprogram of a transmitting CPU.
Not used in the SICAM RTU.
Asynchronous Module diagnosis, 80 ... 87 26 No

errors Time error (highest)
Stack error
Startup OBs Power ON, 100, Can only be No

Mode switch, communication task 102 interrupted during
startup by
asynchronous
errors
Synchronous I/O access error, 121, Priority of the class –

errors Programming error 122 in which the error
occurred

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
5.4 Diagnostic Buffer
With a programming device (PG) or a PC, you can use SIMATIC

standard functions for reading out the diagnostic buffer of the CPU and
of the MCP communications module.
Instructions on how to do that can be found in the manuals:
SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2 /1/
SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Reference Manual for V5.2 /2/
SIMATIC S7/M7, Programmable Controllers Module Specifications
S7-400, M7-400 /3/.
CPU-STOP The CPU is set into STOP state due to a fatal runtime errror. Before this,
an error code is entered into Battery1 and sometimes also into Battery2.
A CPU stop caused by the eRTU driver can be detected as follows:
1. Checking the diagnostic circulating buffer of the CPU: One of the last
commands is "STOP by STOP command"
2. Evaluation of the stacks ⇒ error code in Battery.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5.5 Status Indications
System events are generated by the various components of the

SICAM eRTU system and transmitted to the CPU module. Being status
indications, some of them can be parameterized using
SICAM plusTOOLS.
System events are always identified by a component ID and a channel
number.
In the following table those status indications that can be parameterized
are summarized according to their origin.
Table 5-3 Parameterizable status indications
Channel ID Failure indication text Origin

number
149 (95hex) 4 to 9 MCP-Komp-Key <> RTC MCP
176 (B0hex) 4 to 9 GA-Error UPF-Expert MCP
192 (C0hex) 4 to 9 BSEND-Error Prio Low MCP
193 (C1hex) 4 to 9 BSEND-Error Prio High MCP
128 (80hex) 129 OB80 Time error internal
129 (81hex) 129 OB81 Power supply error internal
130 (82hex) 129 OB82 Diagnostic interrupt internal
131 (83hex) 129 OB83 R/I module interrupt internal
132 (84hex) 129 OB84 CPU Hardware fault internal
133 (85hex) 129 OB85 Program seq. error internal
134 (86hex) 129 OB86 Rack failure internal
135 (87hex) 129 OB87 Communication error internal

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
Group indications The CPU combines selected status indications into group indications.
The group faults of the I/O modules are also available as status
indications; consequently, they are also entered into the SICAM
Diamond event list.
Single faults will only be included in the group fault indications if the
diagnosis alarm of the respective module is released.
All group fault indications can be configured for teletransmission to the
control centre with SICAM plusTOOLS.
The following table lists the fault indications generated by the CPU. The
meaning of the fault numbers is described in Table 5-5.
Table 5-4 Status indications, group faults (generated by the CPU)
Fault Group fault Fault of Fault number
53 Indicator input error DI 192, 193, 194, 196, 198, 255

CR 192, 193, 194, 196, 198, 255
54 Measured input error AI 192, 193, 194, 198, 199, 255
55 Command output error CO 192, 193, 194, 198, 255

CR 192, 193, 194, 199, 200, 255
58 Chatter inhibit active DI 197
I-/O modules The following table shows indications of the SICAM eRTU input/output
modules which are part of the group faults mentioned above.
Table 5-5 Indications of the input/output modules
Alarm no. Module Error text short/long
192 DI Front_plug_missing/Front plug missing!

CO
CR
C0hex AI
193 DI Synchr_failed/Synchronization failed

CO
CR
C1hex AI
194 DI Param_error/
CO Incorrect parameters received!
CR
C2hex AI

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 5-5 Indications of the input/output modules
195 DI External_error
C3hex
196 DI Ext_aux_supply_miss/External auxiliary

CR supply missing
C4hex
197 DI Chatter_blocking_active/
Chatter blocking active
C5hex
198 DI Buffer_overflow/
CO Buffer overflow
CR
C6hex AI
199 CR AD_converter_error /Analog/digital

AI converter error
C7hex
200 CR Command_out_volt_missing/
Command output voltage missing!
C8hex
201 CO
CR
C9hex
244 Creeping_GI_error/
No creeping GI available!
F4hex
255 Module_unplugged/
Module unplugged!
FFhex

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
Communication Status indications of the telecontrol and bay device links are interrogated
links with data type after the start-up of the MCP and transmitted to the CPU;
during operation they will be transmitted only spontaneously. These
indications can be configured for teletransmission to the control centre
with SICAM plusTOOLS.
The fault indications of the telecontrol and bay device protocols are
described in the Appendix.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5.6 General Interrogation
5.6 General Interrogation
A general interrogation updates the network image upon system startup

or prior to establishing a connection to the higher-level control centre.
This is done according to the following principle:
Telecontrol application initiates general interrogation
Prior to establishing a communication link to a higher-level control centre,
the telecontrol application updates its network image. In the initial state,
all items of information of the network image are set to invalid. The
application requests the necessary data by sending a general
interrogation to all components connected to it. After all components
have sent their answers, the image is checked.
Components process general interrogation:
Components that can answer at once to the general interrogation
(because the image has already been updated or the component has
direct access to process information) transmit their image at once to
the component that has output the interrogation.
Components whose image has not been updated yet send general
interrogations to the components connected to them. Once these
general interrogations are finished and the image has been checked,
it is re-transmitted to the component which requests the information.
A general interrogation end message indicates that the interrogation is
complete.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions
5.7 Clock Synchronization
SICAM eRTU time synchronization is done via the communications

processor MCP of an MCP assembly or via the CPU module. This clock
master controls the setting and synchronization of all clock slaves.
If an MCP is a clock master, CPU, other MCPs, I/O modules and
devices connected via the communication links are clock slaves in
terms of clock control.
When you configure the CPU the parameter As Slavemust be selected
under Synchronization in AS, the other MCPs are configured without
clock signal.
When clock synchronization is done via theCPU, all MCPs must be
parameterized without clock signal.
External In the SICAM eRTU, clock setting and clock master MCP synchronization
synchronization can be realized optionally by:
Time signal receiver:
DCF77
GPS
IRIG-B
Telegrams from control centre.
For time signal reception, a SYNC-input is provided on the MCP module.

Permanent checks and corrections of the quartz accuracy ensure that the
absolute time kept by the clock master does not deviate more than 1 ms
from the reference time.
With synchronization via telegram from the control centre, the accuracy
is 10 ms.
Upon failure of the external synchronization, the clock status is set to not
synchronized. If there is no external synchronization for more than
6 minutes, the internal absolute time will deviate by more than 1 ms and
the clock status will change to invalid.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5.7 Clock Synchronization
Synchronization of The internal synchronization by the clock master is performed once a

the system minute. The I/O modules work with a resolution of 1ms and an accuracy
of ±2ms on that time base.
Bay devices, which are synchronized via communication links, have a
maximum deviation of ≤ 20 ms.
Without external After reset or pulling/plugging in the MCP assembly, the MCP
synchronization communications processor takes over the time set by the CPU clock. If
the MCP is the clock master, it uses this CPU time until it receives its
external clock signal again.
Synchronization The normalized clock signal IRIG-B does not contain the year.
with IRIG-B Therefore, when the hardware configuration is compiled by
SICAM plusTOOLS the year is supplemented by the current year.
It can be changed any time during the runtime via the SIMATC Manger.
To this end, mark the MCP assembly which takes over the clock control
and select via the context menuTarget system → Set clock.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
5 System Functions

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Functions of the Digital Input Module 6
This chapter describes the functions of the digital input module. The last
section of the chapter explains the corresponding parameters.
Contents 6.1 State Capturing 158
6.2 Indications of the DI 159
6.3 Bitstrings 161
6.4 Transformer Taps 162
6.5 Metered Value Capturing 163
6.6 Parameters of the DI Module 164

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
6 Functions of the Digital Input Module
6.1 State Capturing
The state capturing function is the default setting for all inputs. It causes
the module to be operated in standard S7 mode, i.e. in process image
mode.
All process signals which are present at the inputs of the digital input
module are written cyclically into the process input image (PII).
Note:
The process image on the module is always updated cyclically, even if all
inputs are parameterized for request mode.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
6.2 Indications of the DI
6.2 Indications of the DI
In telecontrol engineering and substation control and protection, binary

process signals are called indications. They identify the states of the
devices (sensors, switches) which are assigned to them.
Indication changes are captured chronologically with a resolution of 1 ms
on the DI digital input module.
We distinguish between the following indication types:
Fleeting indication
Single-point indication
Double-point indication
Single-point The single-point indication occupies only one input on the module. It can
indication represent two states of a device (e.g. ON/OFF).
Each change of the input signal from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 (rising edge and
falling edge of the indication) results in a data entry in the EPE event
buffer and an update of the PII process image.
Fleeting indication The fleeting indication occupies only one input on the module.
Each change of the input signal updates the PII process image. However,
only the change of the input signal from 0 to 1 (rising edge of the
indication) results in a data entry in the EPE event buffer.
Double-point A double-point indication can represent two determined states of a

indication device (e.g. ON/OFF) and two undetermined states (intermediate
positions). Undetermined states are represented by two identical bits.
The individual states and their meanings are listed in Table 6-1.
A double-point indication always occupies two inputs on the module. The
first input is always even-numbered (e.g. I2.0), and the OFF state must
be assigned to it.
Each change of the input signals results in a data entry in the EPE event
buffer and an update of the PII process image.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
If double-point indications are parameterized with intermediate position

suppression, the time stamp indicates the moment when the double-
point indication reaches a determined state or, in case of an
undetermined state, the moment when the intermediate position
suppression time expires.
In order to prevent for example that an intermediate position is
transmitted when a circuit-breaker switches, an intermediate position
suppression time (e.g. 300 ms) can be parameterized.
Table 6-1 States of a double-point indication
Signal level Signal level Meaning

of second input, of first input
e.g. I2.1 e.g. I2.0
0 0 Intermediate position
(fault position)
0 1 OFF
1 0 ON
1 1 Fault
(fault position)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
6.3 Bitstrings
6.3 Bitstrings
The bit pattern capturing function makes it possible to acquire freely

definable device states using several inputs (e.g. encoded sensor value).
Entry into After one of the following events, data are written into the event buffer:
event buffer
Internal trigger
External trigger
The inputs I3.5, I3.6 and I3.7 are permanently assigned to the
external trigger.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
6.4 Transformer Taps
The transformer tap function makes it possible to acquire all determined

and undetermined states of transformer tap sensors using several inputs.
Upon start of tap changing (signal change from 0 to 1 at the moving
contact input), the monitoring time is started. After the transformer taps
have changed and tap changing is finished (signal change from 1 to 0 at
the moving contact input), the data are transferred and the monitoring
time is reset.
Monitoring of the moving contact can be parameterized.
Fault processing Fault processing ensures that the current state of the transformer tap
position is always transmitted.
If the moving contact exceeds the parameterized monitoring time, the
current tap position value with set moving contact is transferred as fault
identification and the trigger is set.
If the external fault input is connected and is set, the present tap position
value is transferred with set error bit and the trigger is set.
The falling edge of a moving contact which has been present for too long
or of an external fault results in the present tap position value being
transferred once again and in a trigger being set.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
6.5 Metered Value Capturing
6.5 Metered Value Capturing
With this function, meter pulses of external meter pulse generators are
captured and added up.
The DI module keeps a counting memory and a transfer memory for each
of the 16 metered values (maximum). The captured pulses are counted
into the counting memory. By means of a restore procedure, the contents
of the counting memory is moved to the transfer memory. The contents
of the transfer memory is made available for collection by the CPU.
Metered value capturing can be selected for groups of 4 metered values
(i.e., for entire bytes) on the DI module. Unused metered value inputs
within a byte cannot be parameterized for indication acquisition. The
metered value functions can be parameterized separately for each
metered value.
With each restore procedure, the restore status bit in the data record is
inverted. Thus the CPU is able to check whether there has been a restore
procedure.
In case of a voltage failure and/or system stop, the pulses which have
been added up so far are lost.
Fault processing In the data record, two error status bits are kept:
external error bit
The external error bit represents the state of the fault signal input (if
parameterized).
internal error bit
The internal error bit is set after the startup of the DI module and is
deleted after the second restore procedure.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
6.6 Parameters of the DI Module
On the following pages, the parameters of the digital input module are
described in alphabetical order.
Note:
Activate only those inputs which you use. This speeds up the processing
time. The process image of the deactivated inputs is updated
nevertheless.
Evaluation of If a signal is present at the external fault input and this option is activated,
external error bit the present tap position value is transferred with set error bit and the
(transformer taps) trigger is set.
Trigger delay The additional delay in processing an edge change, which is controlled
(single-point by the trigger delay function, ensures suppression of:
indication, fleeting
automatic reclosing
indication,double-
point indication strong contact chatter
disturbing pulses and voltage drops on the signal lines.
The maximum trigger delay time which can be parameterized is 25.5 s
(for comparison: hardware filter timemax. 64 msec).
The trigger delay time is independent of the hardware filter time.
Note:
Especially when parameterizing fleeting indications, please observe that
the total delay time of a signal input is the sum of hardware filter time plus
trigger delay time.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
When calculating the time stamp, the trigger delay time and the hardware
filter time are taken into consideration by the internal microprocessor of
the DI module.
1. Trigger with rising edge of an indication
80 %
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
t (ms)
Trigger delay time
Z Rising edge of indication is detected

2. Filtering of disturbing pulses at signal input
80 %
t (ms)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Trigger delay time
Z Rising edge of indication not detected

3. Trigger with retriggerable delay time
80 %
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
t (ms)
Z
Trigger delay time
Z Rising edge of indication is detected
= Hardware filter time (here: 2 ms) Trigger delay time (here: 50 ms) Z = Time stamp
SUC027
Fig. 6-1 Principle of operation of the trigger delay

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Bit pattern trigger The bit patterns which are present at the inputs are written into the event
(bit pattern) buffer after:
external trigger
smoothing time.
The external trigger is captured by the fourth input byte (i.e., byte 3).
The inputs of this byte are permanently assigned to the first three input
bytes.
1 x 24 bits
1 x 8 bits+
1 x 16 bits
1 x 16 bits
3 x 8 bits
2 x 8 bits
1 x 8 bits
Input
I0.0
I0.1
I0.2
I0.3
I0.4
I0.5
I0.6
I0.7
I1.0
I1.1
I1.2
I1.3
I1.4
I1.5
I1.6
I1.7
I2.0
I2.1
I2.2
I2.3
I2.4
I2.5
I2.6
I2.7
I3.0
I3.1
I3.2
I3.3
I3.4
I3.5 ETI3
I3.6 ETI2 ETI2 ETI2
I3.7 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1 ETI1
ETI = input for external trigger
= input not assigned (free)
SUC023
Fig. 6-2 Input assignment for bit pattern acquisition
The bitstring time-out ensures that all binary digits of encoded bit
patterns have settled safely and are present in a stable way before
processing starts. The recovery time can be parameterized between 0 s
and 25.5 s in increments of 0.1 s.
In all other respects, the effect and the behavior of this function
correspond to those of the retriggerable trigger delay time.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Diagnosis alarm The diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module
release detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. The diagnosis alarm must
always be activated in order to ensure that the fault indication is available
to the CPU.
Recorded meter Either only rising or rising and falling meter pulse edges are processed.
pulse edge
Meter pulses with evaluation of the rising edge (unidirectional current
(metered value)
pulse):
The counting memory is incremented in case of a signal change from
0 to 1 at the meter pulse input.
Meter pulses with evaluation of the rising and falling pulse edge
(bidirectional current pulse):
The counting memory is incremented in case of a signal change from
0 to 1 and from 1 to 0 at the meter pulse input.
Chatter blocking Defective sensors or interposing relays generate enormous event-signal

(single-point bursts through permanent signal changes (the so-called signal chatter),
indication, fleeting which may eventually lead to a system overload.
indication, double-
In order to avoid this phenomenon, it is possible to parameterize an
point indication, bit
automatic signal blocking. Each status change increments a counter
pattern, transformer
which is assigned to the input. It is checked whether the status changes
taps)
reach a parameterizable amount within a time window (control time).
If the admissible amount of status changes is exceeded, the
corresponding input is disabled and a chatter blocking status indication
is transmitted to the CPU (fault indication).
After a defined time interval (blocking time), it is checked whether the
signal continues to chatter. If it does not chatter any longer, it is de-
blocked and the current status is transmitted to the CPU. If the signal
continues to chatter, the blocking is upheld and the corresponding check
is performed once again after another time interval.
Hardware filter time Each one of the inputs I0.0 to I3.7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The
(all functions) applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage for each input
group (I0.x to I3.x). This reference voltage is directly proportional to the
applied signaling-circuit voltage (US0 to US3). If the input voltage present
at inputs I0.0 to I3.7 exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, the

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
100
“1” signal
Signal level
80
“0” signal
Signal profile
0.25 ms
Sampling time
0
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 t (ms)
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
Digital filter (shift register) Parameterized filter time
(here: 1 ms)
Status change to "1" recognized:

process change is processed
Absolute time of change is calculated
back to the beginning of the filter time.
SUC027
Fig. 6-3 Principle of operation of the input filter
The hardware filter eliminates transient conditions of the process signal.

It can be parameterized in increments of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 ms.
Fault position When a double-point indication changes from a determined state (e.g.
suppression time OFF) to another (e.g. ON), then both input signals temporarily pass an
(double-point undetermined state, the fault position. In order to suppress the fault
indication) position indication, a suppression time can be parameterized.
Upon expiration of the parameterized fault position suppression time, the
fault position is transmitted with the current time stamp.
We recommend parameterizing always a minimum fault position
suppression time of e.g. 300 ms for double-point indications.
Transformer tap The transformer tap values which are present at the inputs are written
trigger into the event buffer after:
expiration of the moving contact monitoring time
expiration of the transformer tap smoothing time.
If you parameterize Moving contact as transformer tap trigger type, then

the data are written into the event buffer after a transformer tap change
in the following cases:
The moving contact indicates a constant position (falling pulse of the
moving contact)
The parameterized moving contact monitoring time has been
exceeded.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Note:
Please make sure that you parameterize an interval which is long enough
to allow the tap changer to conclude its regulation procedure.
If you parameterize After smoothing time as transformer tap trigger

type, then the data are transferred after a transformer tap change as
soon as the transformer tap smoothing time has expired. During this time,
the transformer tap value stays present without any change at the inputs.
For both trigger types, you can parameterize a time between 0s and
25.5s in increments of 0.1s. The default setting is 2 s.
Transformer tap When capturing transformer taps, the following types of encoding are
encoding possible:
Dual code (admissible transformer tap values: 0 to 63)
BCD code (admissible transformer tap values: 0 to 39)
(1-out-of-n) code (admissible transformer tap values: 1 to number of
occupied inputs).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Dual BCD
code code
Input Function Function
Ix.0 20 20
Ix.1 21 21 Units
Ix.2 22 Transfor- 22
Transfor-
Ix.3 23 mer step 23 mer step
Ix.4 24 2 4
Tens
Ix.5 25 25
Ix.6 Error bit Error bit (EB)
Ix.7 Moving Contact Moving contact (MC)
(1-out-of-n) code
Transformer tap value with
Input 8 bits 16 bits 24 bits 32 bits
I0.0 1 1 1 1
I0.1 2 2 2 2
I0.2 3 3 3 3
I0.3 4 4 4 4
I0.4 5 5 5 5
I0.5 6 6 6 6
I0.6 7 (EB) 7 7 7
I0.7 8 (MC) 8 8 8
I1.0 9 9 9
I1.1 10 10 10
I1.2 11 11 11
I1.3 12 12 12
I1.4 13 13 13
I1.5 14 14 14
I1.6 15 (EB) 15 15
I1.7 16 (MC) 16 16
I2.0 17 17
I2.1 18 18
I2.2 19 19
I2.3 20 20
I2.4 21 21
I2.5 22 22
I2.6 23 (EB) 23
I2.7 24 (MC) 24
I3.0 25
I3.1 26
I3.2 27
I3.3 28
I3.4 29
I3.5 30
I3.6 31 (EB)
I3.7 32 (MC)
SUC024
Fig. 6-4 Transformer tap encoding
A transformer tap indication in dual code always occupies 8 inputs. 6

inputs of which are reserved for transformer taps and one input is
reserved for moving contact and one for fault indication. Admissible
transformer taps are the values between 0 and 63. The input assignment
is shown in Figure 6-4.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A transformer tap indication in BCD code also occupies always 8 inputs.

4 inputs of which are reserved for the units of the transformer taps, 2
inputs for the tens and one input each for moving contact and fault
indication. Admissible transformer taps are the values between 0 and 39.
The input assignment is shown in Figure 6-4.
The BCD value is converted to a dual value by the digital input module.
Transformer tap indications with (1-out-of-n) encoding are possible with
(1-out-of-6), (1-out-of-14), (1-out-of-22) and (1-out-of-30) inputs. Moving
contact and fault indication always occupy, if present, the last two inputs.
The highest value here depends on the number of the occupied inputs.
The assignment of the inputs is shown in Figure 6-4.
The (1-out-of-n) value is converted to a dual value by the digital input
module.
Restoring During the restore procedure, the internal counting memory is copied to
(metered value a transfer memory. The contents of the transfer memory is sent to the
CPU in request mode.
If you activate Erase counting memory, the counting memory is cleared
after the restore procedure. This corresponds to a metered value with
reset function.
If you deactivate Erase counting memory, the counting memory retains
its contents after the restore procedure and further meter pulses are
added to it. This corresponds to a metered value without reset function.
The Restore trigger determines the intervals at which the internal
counting memory (see Restore trigger via) is copied. You can
parameterize 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min and
60 min for the restorage trigger. The default setting is 15 min.
Restorage trigger The restore trigger may come from:

(metered value)
internal clock
CPU order
external input.
The above options can also be activated simultaneously.

When the trigger comes from an internal clock, you parameterize the
restore interval user-specifically.
When the trigger is set by CPU order, you can choose between initiating
the restore procedure by a restore command from the control center or
from the HMI station or by a derived restore command.
When you activate external input, the odd-numbered input channel is
used as restore input; otherwise this input is used as fault signal input.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Functions of the Analog Input Modules 7
This chapter explains measured value capturing on the analog input
module and describes the corresponding parameters.
Contents 7.1 Measured Value Capturing 174
7.2 Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules 175

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
7 Functions of the Analog Input Modules
7.1 Measured Value Capturing
The analog process signals which are present at the inputs of the analog
input module are referred to as measured values.
The measured values are sampled cyclically one after the other via the
multiplexer, converted and written into the process input image (PII).
If parameterized, the measured values are furthermore chronologically
written into the event buffer (EPE) with a resolution of 1 ms, with
additional information.
Input area / Measuring ranges which belong together are grouped into input areas. In
measuring range order to optimize the measuring accuracy, a specific reference voltage is
provided for each input area.
Parameterization of a measuring range can be realized only within the
input area assigned to it, even on one module. Thus recalibrations are
avoided, which would otherwise prolong the encoding time considerably.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
7.2 Parameters of the AI-C and AI-V Modules
On the following pages, the parameters of the analog input modules are
described in alphabetical order.
Note:
nevertheless.
Diagnosis alarm A diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module
release detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. When the diagnosis alarm is
activated, the fault indication is forwarded to the CPU.
Input area An identical input area must be parameterized for all inputs of the AI
module. The input area is always valid for the whole module. You can
choose one of the ranges of values which are listed in the following table:
Table 7-1 Ranges of values for the inputs of the AI-C or AI-V module
AI-C (current input) AI-V (voltage input)

± 1 mA ±1V
± 20 mA ± 6V
Standard setting
± 24 mA ± 10 V
Standard setting
Event buffer input The event buffer input must be activated, otherwise no events are written
into the EPE event buffer of the inputs. The measured values are written
chronologically into the EPE after threshold processing, complemented
with additional information. The time resolution is 1 ms.
With additive threshold processing, the measured value which was last
written into the EPE event buffer of the inputs, the old value, remains
stored.
Each new value resulting from a measuring signal conversion is
compared to the stored old value. The differences to the old value are
added with the correct sign in the addition buffer. When the sum exceeds
the parameterized threshold, there is an event generation, i.e. the current
measured value is written into the EPE with time stamp. This newly-
entered measured value remains stored as the "new" old value, and the
addition buffer is reset to 0.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
+
3,0
2,0
Parameterized threshold
1,0
Measure value profile

0 t
-1,0
Sampling of
intervals
0,0 0,0 0,0 0,5 0,0 -0,8 -0,4 0,0 0,2 0,6 1,0 1,4 1,8 2,2 2,6 2,9 1,2 0,4 0,3 0,1 0,0 0,0 0,0 Measured value
(absolute)
0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 0,0 1,0 1,0 1,8 1,8 2,6 2,6 1,2 1,2 0,3 0,3 0,3 0,3 "Old value"
Difference to
0,0 0,0 0,0 0,5 0,0 -0,8 -0,4 0,0 0,2 0,6 1,0 0,4 0,8 0,4 0,8 0,3 -1,4 -0,8 -0,9 -0,2 -0,3 -0,3 -0,3
"Old value"
Contents of
0,0 0,0 0,0 0,5 0,5 -0,3 -0,7 -0,7 -0,5 0,1 1,1 0,4 1,2 0,4 1,2 0,3 -1,1 -0,8 -1,7 -0,2 -0,5 -0,8 -1,1
addition buffer
Moment of
event generation
Measured value
0,0 1,0 1,8 2,6 1,2 0,3 0,0
written into EPE
SUC028
Fig. 7-1 Principle of the additive threshold function
This processing principle corresponds to the VDEW recommendation.

If you parameterize a threshold of 0 %, all converted measured values
are written into the event buffer.
Note:
In view of the data volume which would be generated, we do not
recommend parameterizing a threshold < 3 % for more than just a few
inputs.
Please observe that with additive threshold processing, also lasting
changes of the measuring signal which are smaller than the
parameterized threshold result in an entry in the EPE as soon as the sum
of these minor changes is equal to this threshold.
Measuring range Here you define the measuring range for each input. What measuring
ranges can be selected depends on the set input area. You have the
choice between symmetrical or asymmetrical ranges.
Zero suppression The zero suppression serves for stabilizing the converted values which
are near zero. The portion of the measuring range that is to be
suppressed is set in percent. All measured values within that measuring
range portion are set to zero.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Encoding start When you set a synchronous encoding start, the sampling cycle starts
value in seconds at the interval which has been parameterized in Encoding start value
in seconds. The beginning of a cycle is related to the absolute system
time.
The default setting for the encoding start value in seconds with
synchronous start is 15 s, i.e. the sampling cycle starts at 0, 15, 30, 45
seconds.
Interference In this box, you indicate the frequency of your supply network for filtering
voltage supply-side interference signals out from the measured values.
suppression
In addition to the 16 2/3, 50 and 60 Hz network frequencies, the
frequency range of the interference voltage suppression can be
parameterized in integer values from 1 to 100 Hz and is valid for all inputs
of a module.
The default setting is 50 Hz.
Encoding start The inputs of the analog input module are read out one after the other,
and the measured values converted to digital values. The beginning of
this process can be parameterized as:
asynchronous
synchronous
When you select an asynchronous encoding start, the measured values
are captured continuously.
When you set a synchronous encoding start, the sampling cycle starts
at the interval which has been parameterized in Encoding start value
in seconds. The beginning of a cycle is related to the absolute system
time.
Measured values snapshot

With input 0, you capture measured values with threshold 0 % every
second (synchronous encoding start, 1 s).
Recommendation: We recommend you to parameterize a threshold of at
least 3 % for the other inputs.
Note:
If you want to capture values with an encoding start value in seconds of
1 s, you must deactivate at least one input. Reason: On the AI-32
module, one acquisition cycle takes 1005 ms when all inputs are
activated and an identical measuring range has been parameterized for
all inputs. With different measuring ranges, one cycle takes even longer.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Functions of the Command Output Module 8
This chapter describes the functions of the command output module.
Contents 8.1 Command Output Module 180
8.2 Digital Output 182
8.3 Parameters of the CO Module 183

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
8 Functions of the Command Output Module
8.1 Command Output Module
The CO command output module can output commands in request mode

and in process image mode. The commands in request mode can be
parameterized as:
Single command
Double command
8.1.1 Single Commands
Single commands occupy only one output, which is used for setting the
corresponding process state to ON or OFF:
Command is → output voltage is → load
executed switched through disconnecting
relay is ON
Command is → output voltage is → load

concluded disconnected disconnecting
relay is OFF
Output type The maximum amount of single commands depends on the output type.
.
Table 8-1 Single command assignment of a CO module
Output type*
1-pole 1 1/2-pole 2-pole
Max. amount of 32 32 16
single commands
* see Chapter 3.4.2
Typical Resetting a transient earth-fault relay

applications
Restore signal for counter
Interrupt acknowledgment
General production control tasks.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
8.1 Command Output Module
8.1.2 Double Commands
Double commands always occupy two outputs. They cause the OFF or
ON process state, with the first output having the OFF function and the
second one the ON function.
The two outputs of a double command can never be activated
simultaneously.
When configuring the outputs, the following points have to be taken into
account:
With 1-pole wiring, the OFF function of the double command can only
be assigned to even-numbered outputs.
With 2-pole wiring, the OFF function of the double command can only
be assigned to the outputs 00/01, 04/05, etc. to 14/15.
Output type The maximum amount of double commands depends on the output type.
Table 8-2 Double command assignment of a CO module
Output type*
1-pole 1 1/2-pole 2-pole
Max. amount of 16 16 8
double commands
Function OFF even-numbered even-numbered the outputs:

assigned to outputs outputs 00/01, 04/05, etc.
to 14/15
* see Chapter 3.4.2
Typical Control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground electrodes

applications
Transformer tap changing up/down.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
8.2 Digital Output
The digital output function allows the simultaneous and time-independent

setting or resetting of single or multiple outputs.
Bit patterns or digital setpoint values are output in the "digital output"
operating mode. The output is realized in process image mode, whereby
the monitoring functions which are incorporated on the CO function
module (e.g. comparison of the output bit pattern to the process image,
continuous self-test and diagnostics function, etc.) are used.
Caution:
Restrictions for digital output:
• Digital outputs must not occupy more than 16 digits (independently of
the wiring).
• With 1-pole wiring, only outputs which are located on the same
selection line (UI0 or UI1, see Figure 3-9 ) can be used for a digital
output, i.e. only even-numbered outputs.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
8.3 Parameters of the CO Module
8.3 Parameters of the CO Module
The command parameters of the command output module are described

below in alphabetical order.
Note:
Activate only those outputs which you use. This speeds up the
processing time.
Command On the command output module, you can parameterize the following
command types:
SC (single command)
DC (double command).
If you have selected 2-pole command output or double commands, every
second output or every second output pair is
functionally assigned (FA).
Diagnosis alarm A diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module
release detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. When the diagnosis alarm is
activated, the fault indication is forwarded to the CPU.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Functions of the Command Release Module 9
This chapter describes the functions of the command release module. At
the end of the chapter the parameters of the command release module
are explained.
Contents 9.1 Inputs of the CR Module 186
9.2 Outputs of the CR Module 187
9.3 Parameters of the Command Release Module 188

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
9 Functions of the Command Release Module
9.1 Inputs of the CR Module
9.1.1 Indications of the CR Module
For operation in request mode, the following indication types can be

assigned to the inputs of the CR module:
single-point indication or
fleeting indication.
These types of indications are described in the chapter Indications of the
DI in detail see Chapter 6.2).
9.1.2 State Capturing
The state capturing function is the default setting for all inputs. This
function causes the process signals which are present at the inputs of the
command release module to be written into the process input image (PII)
cyclically (process image mode).
Note:
The process image on the module is always updated cyclically, even if
other functions have been parameterized for all inputs.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
9.2 Outputs of the CR Module
9.2 Outputs of the CR Module
9.2.1 Digital Output of the CR Module
The digital output function allows the simultaneous and time-independent

setting or resetting of single or multiple outputs. It is only possible with
operation in process image mode (see also Chapter 8.2).
The following outputs are provided on the CR command release module:
4 outputs as changeover contacts
4 outputs as normally open contacts.
Via the APA job buffer, the CPU hands over structured jobs to the CR
module for further processing. These jobs include:
Check / release jobs
release of the command output circuit
switching current check
General control jobs.
The CR module answers these jobs with process feedbacks. As soon as

these are ready for collection by the CPU, the CR module issues a
hardware interrupt.
Note:
Safe and reliable command output is possible in combination with CO
modules. The individual command circuits are parameterized via
SICAM plusTOOLS (assignment of the CO module to the respective CR
module).
You will find related information in SICAM eRTU, Manual
SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks /15/.
Note:
Job-controlled outputs are not supported by the SICAM eRTU!

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
9 Functions of the Command Release Module
9.3 Parameters of the Command Release Module
The parameters of the command release module are listed below.
Note:
nevertheless.
Trigger delay The additional delay in processing an edge change, which is controlled
(single-point by the trigger delay function, ensures suppression of:
indication)
automatic reclosing
strong contact chatter
disturbing pulses and voltage drops on the signal lines.
The maximum trigger delay time which can be parameterized is 25.5 s
(for comparison: hardware filter time max. 64 ms).
The trigger delay time is independent of the hardware filter time.
Note:
Especially when parameterizing fleeting indications, please observe that
the total delay time of a signal input is the sum of hardware filter time plus
trigger delay time.
Diagnosis alarm The diagnosis alarm is triggered by the fault events which the module
release detects thanks to its diagnostic functions. The diagnosis alarm must
always be activated in order to ensure that the fault indication is available
to the CPU.
Hardware filter time Each one of the inputs I0.0 to I3.7 is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. The
(single-point applied input voltage is compared to a reference voltage for each input
indication, fleeting group (I0.x to I3.x). This reference voltage is directly proportional to the
indication,double- applied signaling-circuit voltage (US0 to US3). If the input voltage present
point indication) at inputs I0.0 to I3.7 exceeds approx. 80 % of the signaling voltage, the

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Configuration System
SICAM plusTOOLS 10
Overview The SICAM eRTU is configured with SICAM plusTOOLS. SICAM
plusTOOLS includes applications for configuring and parameterizing the
SICAM eRTU Controllers and its communication with telecontrol and bay
devices.
10.1 Configuring and Parameterizing the SICAM eRTU 190
10.2 Communication with Bay Devices/Substations 191
10.3 Information Configuration 193
10.4 Telecontrol Communication 194
10.5 SICAM CFC 197
10.6 SICAM Diamond 198
10.7 Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data 199

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10 Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS
10.1 Configuring and Parameterizing the SICAM eRTU
The hardware configuration application of SICAM plusTOOLS is used

to configure the SICAM eRTU Contoller according to your needs. You
simply copy the racks and modules from a Hardware Catalog and place
them in the hardware configuration window.
The racks are displayed as tables, the slots as consecutively numbered
rows of the tables. Connections between the central rack and the
expansion racks are drawn as connecting lines.
The hardware parameters of the modules are specified in the module-
specific parameter sheets which you select by simply double-clicking on
the modules.
The parameters have plausible default values, so that the input is limited
to parameters which depend on the specific hardware environment into
which the SICAM eRTU Controller is to be integrated.
After arranging and parameterizing all modules, you complete the
configuration by saving and closing the HW configuration application.
By saving the HW configuration all SAS information items of the
SICAM eRTU Controller are generated. They are then available to all
SICAM applications.
It is possible to modify the hardware configuration later.
Note:
For details on how to configure and parameterize the SICAM eRTU
hardware, please refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.2 Communication with Bay Devices/Substations
10.2 Communication with Bay Devices/Substations
Bay devices Use the SICAM plusTOOLS application COM IED (Communication to
Intelligent Electronic Devices) to integrate bay devices with
IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP V3.00 (COM IED)
Protocols in your SICAM eRTU. Transfer the bay devices from a catalog
and determine the functional scope and information volume of the
devices by parameterizing their version numbers.
The bay devices are connected to the communication interfaces of the
MCP assemblies. Up to 32 devices with the IEC 60870-5-103 or
DNP V3.00 protocol can be connected to one MCP channel.
If busbar protection is connected up to 48 devices per channel are
possible. By means of the object properties of the device you determine
the interface where it is to be connected to an MCP assembly.
Open import interfaces allow you to insert and parameterize user-
definable devices with the IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP V3.00 protocols or
to import externally parameterized bay device data as a dBase file. This
function is used, for instance, to take over the data from SIPROTEC 4
devices which were parameterized with DIGSI.
Bay devices with the PROFIBUS DP interface are connected to the DP
interface of the CPU module and parameterized during hardware
configuration.
Substations The communication interfaces of the MCP assemblies permit connection

of substations that can communicate with the SICAM eRTU Controller by
means of the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
These include
SICAM SC
SICAM RTU
SICAM miniRTU
SICAM microRTU
SINAUT LSA
third-party stations.
Substation connections are also inserted from the catalog and
configured separately according to control and monitoring direction.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The catalogue The catalog of the COM IED application contains the substation
connection IEC 60870-5-101 and all bay devices that can be integrated.
The bay devices are hierarchically structured according to the protocols:
DNP V3.00
DPU2000
User-definable device
IEC 60870-5-103
Bay controllers
User-definable device
Protection devices
Other and third-party manufacturers
By saving the configuration the device information is imported in SICAM
plusTOOLS, linked with SAS information and stored under the device
name. It can then be reduced and structured according to the application.
If you change the version number, the current data will be compared with
the set of indications and commands of the new version. Identical
information items are taken over, missing information items are inserted
and non-existent information items are deleted.
Note:
For details on how to configure and parameterize the bay device and
substation interface, please refer to the SICAM eRTU, Manual
Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.3 Information Configuration
10.3 Information Configuration
Use the SICAM plusTOOLS application SIM (SICAM Information

Manager) to configure
the information for communication with the control centre or
the information for logging or command output through SICAM
Diamond
that you want to use.
All items of information of the SICAM eRTU can be identified via unique
Hierarchical Names. They describe the input / output address of each
individual item of SAS information and its position within the station
topology.
Distribution in In control direction, all commands are distributed which are to be

control direction processed by the system (e.g. commands to the CO modules, the bay
devices and the substations).
You can assign a feedback to each command.
Distribution in All indications, measured values and metered values which are to be
monitoring processed within the system are distributed in monitoring direction. This
direction includes:
indications from the function modules
indications from the connected bay devices and substations
Status information Status information of the bay devices, modules, communication links,
etc., are created automatically during configuration and parameterization
and can be processed just like normal indications or commands.
In the object properties of the status information you define if you want to
provide data for the export to SICAM Diamond and if you want to use
the functions Event list logging and Control.
Modifying the All default designations and the distribution of information can be easily
parameterization modified at any time. This permits you to manually create information
which you need additionally or to reassign existing information. Changes
are automatically updated in all applications upon saving.
Note:
For detailed information on the handling and edit functions of SIM, please
refer to SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.4 Telecontrol Communication
COM TC The SICAM plusTOOLS application COM TC (Communication to

Telecontrol Center) serves for parameterizing telecontrol links to higher-
level control centres.
You select the telegrams you want to transmit, define their telecontrol
addresses, set transmission parameters and assign the telegrams to the
lists you want to use for transmitting them.
What information for communication with the control centre is required,
is configured in the SIM table.
The address structure depends on the settings you have specified for the
transmission channel in the Hardware Configuration.
Transmission The following telecontrol protocols to higher-level control centres are

protocols supported:
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP)
SINAUT 8-FW
DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800
TELEGYR 8979

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.4 Telecontrol Communication
Protocol Maximally two different telecontrol protocols per MCP can be combined
combinations for ensuring the communication of the SICAM eRTU with higher-level
control centers.
Different protocols to higher-level control centers can be used for the
connection of a substation (via the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol).
The table below includes a list of the possible protocol combinations.
Table 10-1 Possible protocol combinations
Protocol combinations to control Protocol combinations to

centers substations / units
SINAUT 8-FW, IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
DNP V3.00, IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
DNP V3.00, SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800, IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800, SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Transmission In addition, you can specify different transmission parameters for each
parameters telegram in COM TC. Thus, for example, you can parameterize for each
short-time indication an individual retention time, or for each double-point
indication an individual fault position suppression time.
For a detailed description of the parameters, please refer to onlinehelp
and SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /
14/.
Telecontrol lists Furthermore, COM TC allows you to combine telecontrol lists for
transmission, i.e. you choose the desired list type from a telecontrol list
catalog, give the list an individual name and assign the telegrams you
want to transmit with this list to it.
For each list, you define the transmission priority and different list-type-
specific transmission parameters (e.g. number of telegrams per trigger,
group number, etc.).
You can choose between the following list types:
Interrogation list
Initiation buffer list
Basic cycle list
Telegram buffer list with time stamp:
Telegram buffer list without time stamp
Subordinate basic cycle list
Counter-controlled list
Time-controlled list
A telegram can be included in several lists.
Modifying Like in all other applications of SICAM plusTOOLS, you can modify the
parameters parameters, addresses or list assignments at any time. The parameter
lists are updated during the next compilation.
When information is deleted in other applications of the configuration
system SICAM plusTOOLS, the COM TC is updated.
Note:
For more information about configuration and parameterization refer to
SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.5 SICAM CFC
10.5 SICAM CFC
SICAM CFC is a graphical configuration system used to realize user-

specific functions. In SICAM eRTU it is used, e.g.
for:
linking SAS information to derived information
configuring locking conditions and switching sequences
integrating bay devices with PROFIBUS DP interface.
A variety of logical CFC modules are available for this. The graphic
interface of the CFC application simplifies the configuration and gives the
links in a clear overview.
For details about the CFC configuration, please refer to the

SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks /15/

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.6 SICAM Diamond
SICAM Diamond is used for diagnostic purposes of system information

such as module data, bay device data, communication links, etc.
SICAM plusTOOLS provides the required data of the SICAM eRTU in a
*.xml file for import by SICAM Diamond.
The process can be graphically represented in single-line diagrams.
Additionally, the process can be monitored and controlled. State changes
are logged in the event list.
You define in the SICAM plusTOOLS application SIM what information is
used for this purpose.
Note:
The single-line functions are realized in SICAM Diamond V2.0.
Note:
For details on working with SICAM Diamond, please refer to the manual
SICAM Diamond /19/.
You will find information about diagnostic features also in chapter 5.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
10.7 Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data
10.7 Compilation of Configured and Parameterized Data
Before the project data are downloaded to the target system, they must
be compiled into system data blocks that can be read internally.
Data must be compiled in the order stated below because each
compilation procedure requires the previous one as input:
1. Compile and save in HW Config.
2. Compile for the target system in SICAM Information Manager.
After correct compilation of all configured data, the system blocks are
ready for transmission to the target system.
Please observe the correct order for loading into the target system:
1. load the substation data onto the memory card of the CPU
2. download the firmware of the MCP assemblies
3. download the system data of the MCP assemblies
Note:
The procedure is described in SICAM eRTU, Manual Configuration
System SICAM plusTOOLS /14/ and in the manual SICAM eRTU,
Mounting Instructions /17/ .
SICAM Report The SICAM Report logs the compilation run in a detailed way with:
status symbol
designation of the log text
date
time
It contains the Overview tab card and a tab card specific to the
substation. The tab cards are automatically generated during
compilation.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Communication with the Control Center 11
This chapter is intended to give you an overview of the principle of
communication and the telegram structure for a data exchange with the
control center.
Contents 11.1 Data Exchange with the Control Center 202
11.2 Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram 215
11.3 Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-104 Telegram 237
11.4 Control Center Link with the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram 256
11.5 Control Center Link with the DNP V3.00 Telegram 276
11.6 Control Center Link with the TELEGYR 800 Telegram 289

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11 Communication with the Control Center
11.1 Data Exchange with the Control Center
Adapted to the tasks of the SICAM eRTU system and the special
environmental conditions involved in the automation of geographically
widespread processes, data communication meets the following
requirements:
Safe transmission
Effective protection of the telegrams is ensured when errors in data
transmission occur due to electromagnetic fields, differences in the
grounding potential, aging components and other sources of interference
and noise on the transmission channels.
Bit and telegram errors are recognized.
Loss of information is recognized.
Undesired information cannot be created.
Related information cannot be separated or otherwise adversely
affected.
Priority-controlled provision of telegrams
Event-triggered telegrams are made available quickly thanks to priority
control.
Efficient transmission of information
A wide variety of telegram types with task-related information and a high-
resolution clock ensure that further processing by both the SICAM eRTU
and the control center meets the demands of actual practice.
11.1.1 Types of Modulation
The SICAM eRTU system uses the following types of modulation for the
bit-serial transmission of telegrams:
Pulse code modulation (PCM)
Digital pulse duration modulation DPDM (SINAUT 8-FW)
verwendet.
Pulse code In pulse code modulation, each character of a data byte has the same
modulation (PCM) length. The information of the character is expressed by the levels low
and high (standard: logical "0" = low and logical "1" = high). The data byte
consists of the following:
a start bit (always a logical "0" level)
8 data bits
a parity bit (makes the data bits with "1" level into an even number)
a stop bit (always logical "1" level)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Time (for transmission speed of 200 bits/sec)

[ms]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
t
Pulse code modulated information
Binary information
+
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Start information Parity Stop
bit bit bit
(= '0') (1) (2) (4) 8 (16) 32 64 (128) (= '1')
1. Data byte 2. Data byte
(Start bit 1 = 68hex = 104dez) (block length = 06 hex)
Logical signals
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
suc210.wmf
Fig. 11-1 Principle of pulse code modulation (PCM)
The transmission duration of a telegram depends on the number of data

bytes. Transmission speeds of up to 64 kbits/sec are possible.
Digital pulse In pulse duration modulation logical "0" is represented by a short

duration character and logical "1" by a long character. A change of edge takes
modulation (DPDM) place after every bit. The ratio of short character to long character is
between 1:2.2 and 1:3.0, depending on the parameterization.
Time (for transmission speed of 200 bits/sec)

0 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 [ms]
t
Pulse duration modulated information
Binary information
+
33 ms 5ms 11 ms
Inhibition time Short characters Long characters
(= 3 long characters) (2.2*short characters)
Logical signals
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
suc211.wmf
Fig. 11-2 Principle of digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM)
The transmission duration of a telegram depends on the number of long

characters. Transmission speeds of up to 1200 bits/sec are possible.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.1.2 Types of Communication
The transmission mode defines the data transmission procedure

between the SICAM eRTU and the control center. Possible modes are:
Symmetric transmission procedure (point-to-point)
Asymmetric transmission procedure (polling)
Symmetric With this type of transmission, the SICAM eRTU and the control center
transmission have the same sending and receiving rights. The SICAM eRTU is
procedure assigned "its own" control center channel in the control center.
(Balanced Mode,
Transmission commands in the control direction are performed
point-to-point)
spontaneously as required. In monitoring direction the process data is
transmitted in “cyclic”, “spontaneous” and “scanned” mode.
The function of control and monitoring directions is monitored via
acknowledgment or check telegrams.
"Central station" function
Sender Receiver
Control Trans- Trans-

toring mission
direction direction path
Receiver Sender
"Substation" function
suc212.wmf
Fig. 11-3 Data exchange in balanced transmission mode

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Asymmetric In this mode, the control center (master) takes the initiative in the data
transmission exchange. The SICAM eRTU (slave) only sends data when requested to
procedure do so by the control center.
(Unbalanced Mode,
The asymmetric transmission procedure permits the control center to use
multi-point
one sender and one receiver to control several SICAM eRTUs and to
transmission)
receive their process information. The individual SICAM eRTUs are
addressed by station number.
Depending on the protocol used, different scan procedures are used:
With the SINAUT 8-FW, this is Quick-Check / Quick-Scan and lower-
level requests for scanning lists.
In IEC 60870-5-101, all stations are scanned for class 1 and/or class
2 data. The SICAM eRTU only recognizes class 1 data. A scan for
class 2 data is always answered with a negative acknowledgment.
However, the answer telegram contains a reference to available class
1 data (spontaneous events or scanned information) where such data
exists (ACD bit).
"Central station" function

Control Center
Sender Receiver
Transmission path
Receiver Sender Receiver Sender Receiver Sender
"Substation" function "Substation" function "Substation" function
SICAM eRTU 1 SICAM eRTU 2 SICAM eRTU n

suc213.wmf
Fig. 11-4 Data exchange in unbalanced transmission mode
11.1.3 Types of Transmission (Operating Modes)
The following Chapter 11.1.4 to Chapter 11.1.6 describe the protocol-

overlapping functions of the transmission types.
The following are available in the SICAM eRTU:
Transmission lists as shown in Table 11-1
16 priorities
Information addresses (telegram numbers) that can be assigned to
any transmission list. The assignment of information addresses is
static; it is performed when the system is parameterized.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
List structure The figure below shows the structure of the lists available in the
SICAM eRTU.
Basic cycle list Triggered continuously by MCP
Triggered by counter based on the

Periodic number of telegrams of the basic
List cycle sent
Prio:
15 Triggered by system clock or
1...8 *) Time- / counter- counter (number of telegrams
controlled lists sent)
Prio:
14 Triggered by command
Scanned lists
from the central office
Prio:
9 ... 13 Triggered by FM
Spontaneous lists for spontaneous
Telegram image process event
Prio: Telegram Buffer
9 ... 13 Triggered
Organizational
List spontaneously
by CPU
Prio: System events
1 ... 8
*) with increased priority
suc214.wmf
Fig. 11-5 List structure in the SICAM eRTU system
Basic cycle
Continuous transmission of information
Periodic list
Transmission of a parameterizable number of telegrams at the end of
the basic cycle
The basic cycle is interrupted for transmission of the following:
Time-controlled lists
Transmission after a parameterized span of time has elapsed.
Counter-controlled lists
Transmission after expiration of a parameterizable telegram counter
Requested lists
Transmission is controlled by the operator, e.g. via a scan command.
The scanned lists are transmitted once.
Spontaneous lists
Transmission after occurrence of the spontaneous event
Organizational list
Transmission e.g. when operational or system events occur (status
indications).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Number of lists The number of lists available depends on the telegram structure. The
following table shows the possible lists:
Table 11-1 Number of parameterizable lists in the SICAM eRTU system
Number of possible lists in the
List SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-101

telegram telegram
structure structure
Cyclic lists
• Basic Cycle 1 1
• Subordinate basic cycle 1 1

(periodic list)
• Time-controlled lists or 8 8
counter-controlled lists Can be switched
on/off
Scanned lists
• Group scanned lists 8 1) 22 2)
Spontaneous lists
• Telegram image procedure
• Telegram storage procedure 16 16

with time
• Telegram storage procedure

without time
• Trigger lists
Organization list
• Telegram storage procedure 1 1

for organizational telegrams
3)
1) Group scanned list 1 contains the general check

2
) The possible lists are divided into
1 general check list
16 groups
1 all metered values
4 groups for metered-valued scan
3)The organizational telegram storage list is generated permanently by the system with
the highest priority.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.1.4 Spontaneous Operating Modes
When symmetric transmission mode is used, a transmission in

spontaneous operating mode only takes place when a spontaneous
event is currently available. The user can parameterize individually which
event triggers a transmission.
Listed below are some examples of causes of spontaneous transmission
in the control direction:
Commands
Scheduled values
Listed below are some examples of causes of spontaneous transmission
in the monitoring direction:
Changes in the state of indications
Measured values that exceeded their threshold
Counter value freeze
Operational and system events (e.g. command not executed)
Changes in information status (e.g. overflow, not current)
The following spontaneous transmission modes are available:
Telegram image In the telegram image mode, the spontaneous process change
mode (indications, measured values, etc.) is entered into the transmission
(trigger mode) image, and the trigger for spontaneous transmission is set. To increase
transmission efficiency, information from a consecutive address area is
transmitted in blocks. In the case of rapid changes and slow transmission
links, however, the transmission image may be overwritten by a more
recent change of the information.
The telegram image mode ensures that the process image of the station
is quickly transmitted to the control center, even if the transmission link is
slow.
For transmission in the telegram image mode, parameterizable trigger
lists with individual transmission priorities are available (see Figure11-5).
Telegrams of this type of list are transferred spontaneously without time
stamp.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Telegram buffer This procedure is used to acquire all process changes and store them
mode temporarily in a cyclic telegram buffer until they can be transferred.
The process changes transferred spontaneously by the function modules
are sorted by the MCP in the order in which they occurred according to
their time stamp. They are entered in the telegram buffer and sent
spontaneously with or without time.
The following telegram buffers exist:
Telegram buffer with time
Telegram buffer without time
Telegram buffer for organizational telegrams
Telegram Spontaneous process changes (indications, measured values, etc.) are

buffer with time transmitted in real time according to the FIFO principle (first-in-first-out).
(transmission with This requires that the telegram address be assigned to a spontaneous list
real time) "telegram buffer with time".
The time information in the telegram is derived from the time stamp
supplied by the function modules. The MCP converts this time stamp of
the time of acquisition on the process input to a time format specific for
telegrams.
Telegram Spontaneous process changes (indications, measured values) are

buffer without time transmitted without time according to the FIFO principle (first-in-first-out).
(transmission in This requires that the telegram address be assigned to a spontaneous list
correct order) "telegram buffer without time".
Telegram For the transmission of organization blocks, a dedicated telegram buffer

buffer for is provided. The organizational telegram buffer list has the priority 0
organizational permanently assigned. This means that all state changes are transmitted
telegrams with the highest priority and in correct chronological order.
Spontaneous Double transmission can be used for indications. This requires that the
double indication be parameterized both in a spontaneous list with the telegram
transmission image procedure and in a spontaneous list with the telegram storage
procedure (usually telegram storage with time).
This permits information on a change in state to be sent quickly to the
control center although the transmission paths are slow while real time
information is then sent with a parameterizable priority.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.1.5 Scanned Transmission Modes
Organizational processes (e.g. change of shifts) or events (e.g.

malfunctions) may make it necessary to scan part or all of the process
information from the control center at a specific point in time.
The SICAM eRTU offers for that purpose lists to which indications,
measured values, metered values and system messages can be freely
assigned. The assignment of information addresses to the lists is static;
it is performed when the system is parameterized.
The lists can also be used in polling systems. The lists are scanned by
the control center at predefined intervals and thus update the image.
Group scan A specific group of information (must be combined in a group scan list)
can be scanned by the control center with a group scan command.
Each time a list is triggered, the number of telegrams that can be
configured for that list is transmitted. If several groups are requested,
they are transmitted in the order of their priority.
One group is reserved for the general interrogation (GI). The general
interrogation list usually contains all non-cyclic telegrams. If a GI is
triggered while another is already in progress, the GI is aborted and
restarted.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.1.6 Cyclic Operating Modes
The operating mode "cyclic" can be used for data transmission without a
check for change by the eRTU. This ensures a continuous update of the
process image in the control center.
Cyclic data transmission is primarily used with dedicated lines and
requires a full-duplex modem, i.e. a separate transmission channel for
the control direction and a separate transmission channel for the
monitoring direction).
The following types of cyclic transmission modes are available:
Basic Cycle
Subordinate cycle
Time-/counter-controlled list
Basic cycle with The basic cycle is intended for the continuous transmission of information
increased priority from the eRTU image. The telegrams are transmitted in ascending order
of their address in the basic cycle list.
The basic cycle list exists only once in the SICAM eRTU. It has the lowest
transmission priority.
When many telegrams from higher-priority lists (e.g. spontaneous or
group scan telegrams) are transferred, there is a danger of process value
update checks being triggered in the control center. To prevent this, a
dynamic increase in priority can be parameterized for the basic cycle list.
All directly consecutive telegrams which are not sent from the basic cycle
or the periodic list are counted. When the parameterizable number of
telegrams is reached, the priority of the basic cycle is increased to high
priority. After the one-time transmission of the basic cycle, the priority
returns to normal.
Subordinate basic The periodic list is subordinate to the basic cycle. This list exists only
cycle once in the eRTU. After the complete basic cycle list has been
(periodic list) transferred, a parameterizable number of telegrams from the periodic list
is faded in between two basic cycles. This requires that priority of the
periodic list be higher than that of the basic cycle.
Measured values whose change is very slow are usually transferred with
the periodic list.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Time-controlled list The time-controlled list is transferred at the end of the parameterized
cycle time. Each time it is triggered, a configurable number of telegrams
from the list is transmitted. The telegrams are transmitted in ascending
order of their address.
The time-controlled operating mode can be switched on/off by the control
center.
List-specific parameters allow to choose between different types of time-
controlled mode:
Number = 1; time > Block cycle with parameterizable pause between

0 telegrams
Number = 1; time = Basic cycle without pauses between telegrams which

0 can be switched on/off
Number > 1; time > Block cycle with parameterizable pause between
0 telegrams
The time-controlled operating mode can be used to implement the

"creeping process data update (GI)" function by transferring a telegram
from the total transmission image to the control center every 5 seconds,
for example.
The time interval can be parameterized from 0 to 6000 seconds (i.e. 100
minutes) in 100-ms increments.
Counter-controlled The counter-controlled list is transferred when a parameterized number

list of telegrams has been sent. All telegrams are counted which are not sent
from the counter-controlled list itself. Each time this list is triggered, the
number of telegrams configured for this list is transferred from the list.
The telegrams are transmitted in ascending order of their address.
The counter-controlled operating mode can be switched on/off by the
control center.
The telegram counter can be parameterized with 0 to 255 telegrams.
Full cyclic mode During full cyclic operation, all telegrams parameterized in the
(only for SINAUT 8- SICAM eRTU are sent to the control center regardless of allocation to
FW telegram transmission lists.
structure)
Full cyclic mode generally occurs after startup and when the error
indication "control direction malfunction" is detected.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.1.7 Telecontrol Protocols
The following can be specified by selection of the telecontrol protocol:

The structure of the data records (i.e. telegram structure)
The representation of the information during transmission (i.e. type of
modulation)
The following telecontrol data transmission protocols are available on the
SICAM eRTU system
IEC 60870-5-101
Format class FT1.2 (corresponds to protection with Hamming
distance d = 4)
IEC 60870-5-104
Pulse code modulation (PCM),
Network link via PPP / RS232
Secure data transmission with TCP/IP
SINAUT 8-FW
Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM)
Protection with Hamming distance d = 2, d = 4 or d = 6
distance d = 4)
DNP V3.00
Format class FT3 (corresponds to protection with Hamming distance
d=6)
TELEGYR 800
distance d = 4)
TELEGYR 8979
distance d = 4)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Protocol Maximally two different telecontrol protocols per MCP can be combined
combinations for ensuring the communication of the SICAM eRTU with higher-level
control centers.
Different protocols to higher-level control centers can be used for the
connection of a substation (via the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol).
The table below includes a list of the possible protocol combinations.
Table 11-2 Possible protocol combinations
Protocol combinations to control Protocol combinations to

centers substations / units
SINAUT 8-FW, IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
DNP V3.00, IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
DNP V3.00, SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800, IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800, SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800, DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
SINAUT 8-FW IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
DNP V3.00 IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00

IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00
IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-101 (substation),

IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-103, DNP V3.00

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.2 Control Center Link with the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram
11.2.1 Communication Principle
The IEC 60870-5-101 telegram structure is pulse code modulated

(Chapter 11.1.1) and is based on the ISO-OSI layer model for open
systems as specified in IEC 60870-5-3 section 4. To achieve very short
reaction times, this telegram uses three of the seven layers:
Physical layer
Link layer
Application layer
Physical layer The physical layer handles the following tasks:

Conversion of the signal to the interface level
Galvanic isolation (2.5kV)
Monitoring of the signal quality
Bit and telegram synchronization
Conversion from parallel to serial telegram presentation
Adding and removing telegram delimiters (start / end characters)
Detection of telegram format errors
Protecting telegrams against loss and errors by creating and checking
check codes
Format class FT1.2 is fulfilled (equivalent to Hamming distance d = 4)
and is, thus, compliant with integrity class I2.
Connect the lines to the control centers at the two 25-pole ports X1/X2
on the front of the MCP.
X1 and X2 can be parameterized as
V.24/V.28 interface - asynchronous
The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200
bits/s and depends on the external conditions.
RS422 interface - asynchronous

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
RS485 interface- asynchronous

X.21 interface - synchronous
The transmission speed is determined by an external cycle and lies
between 600 bits/s and 64 kbits/s.
Data link layer (incl. The data link layer controls the transmission procedure. Its main tasks
transport layer) are:
Performing the basic services in balanced and unbalanced
transmission (e.g. Request / Respond, Send / Confirm).
Adding the control fields in telegrams with mode-specific information.
Application layer Identification and handling of telegram information occurs in the

application layer. Its main tasks are:
Variable structure recognition
Splitting of information blocks
Image management and transmission mode control
Command management
Representation Each data byte of the IEC 60870-5-T101 telegram is supplemented with
a start, parity and stop character. The following figure shows those
characters that are transmitted and those that are shown in telegram
images.
Bit sequence on the line

11. 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Bit
Stop Parity 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Start

bit bit 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 bit
Start character (=68hex) 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Byte 1

Byte 2
User
information Byte n-2
Check sum character Byte n-1
1 x Check sum 0
for entire telegram
End character (= 16hex) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 Byte n
Characters represented
in telegram screens
Transmitted characters
suc215.wmf
Fig. 11-6 Representation of IEC 60870-5-101 telegrams

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Rules of Transmission is subject to 6 rules:

transmission
Rule 1 In quiescent state 1 signal is present on the line.
Rule 2 A character consists of a start bit, 8 information bits, an even
parity bit and a stop bit.
Rule 3 No quiescent states are permissible between the characters
of a telegram.
Rule 4 The user data are finished by an 8-bit checksum (CS). The
checksum is the sum of all user data without carry.
Rule 5 The receiver checks the characters for start bit, stop bit and
an even parity bit. The telegram is checked for the start
character, the telegram checksum, the end character and the
minimum interval between two telegrams. If an error is found
during one of the checks, the telegram is rejected, otherwise
it must be released for further processing.
Rule 6 Between the telegrams a minimum interval of 33 bits
“quiescent state” is necessary, so that in case of an error as
per Rule 5 the receiver can be synchronized.
11.2.2 Telegram Layout
Three types of telegrams are used in IEC 60870-5-101 telegrams.

Telegrams with variable length
Telegrams with fixed length
Single Characters
The following figure shows the different telegram structures.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Telegram with Telegram with

variable length fixed length 1) Single characters
Start char. = 68hex Start char. = 10hex 2) Single char. = E5hex
Block length Header Control field
Protection 3)
Block length Address field
Start char. = 68hex Check sum Appendix
Control field Protection
End char. = 16hex
3)
Address field
"short record"
Telegram ID
1) also called
Var. struct. recognition 2) Header security
Cause of transmission 3) Header data link control
Station address
User
area
Information
address
Information
object
Check sum Appendix

Protection
End char. = 16hex
suc216a.wmf
Fig. 11-7 Layout of IEC 60870-5-101 telegrams in the SICAM eRTU system
Start / end The start and end characters delimit the telegram and are part of the
character telegram protection.
In addition, the start character identifies the telegram:
Start character = 68 hex:Telegram with variable length (long block)
Start character = 10 hex:Telegram with fixed length (short block)
Start character = E5 hex:Single character
Block length The block length field in the header of variable-length telegrams contains
the number of bytes of the user data area plus the link control header.
The value can be up to 255.
Six bytes (4 bytes in the security header and 1 byte each for the check
sum and end character) are added to the contents of the block length
field to obtain the telegram length.
The second block length field repeats the value of the first and is used by
the link layer for checking the telegram.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.2.3 Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram
The link control header in the telegram consists of the following fields:
Control field
Address field
Control field The control field contains information on the direction and type of
telegrams as well as control information to prevent loss or duplication of
telegrams.
Its data content differs in asymmetric and in symmetric transmission
mode:
Control field in asymmetric transmission (unbalanced mode)
MSB LSB
1 2 3
22
2 1
20 Primary to
Control field FCB FCV secondary
RES PRM station
for asymmetric
transmission Secondary to
0 ACD DFC Function primary station
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
The primary station is always the station that caused the transmission of
the message.
The secondary station is always the station that responds to the
message.
Explanation of the field contents:
Function Type of telegram (e.g., user data, interrogation or
acknowledgment).
The meaning of the code is different for each direction of
transmission. See chapter 5.1.2 of the IEC 60870-5-2
standard for a detailed explanation of the code.
FCV Frame Count Bit valid: Informs on the validity of the
telegram (frame) count bit FCB.
FCB The Frame Count Bit is used to prevent loss or
multiplication of messages: the primary station inverts FCB
at each new send/confirm or request/respond service
directed at the same SICAM eRTU. If an expected
response is invalid, or a timeout has occurred, the last
service is repeated with the same FCB.
DFC Data Flow Control: The secondary station notifies the
initiating primary station that immediately following
messages may cause a buffer overflow.
ACD Access Demand: The secondary station notifies the
primary station that high-priority event (class 1 data) are
ready for transmission. The primary station can now
request these data with priority.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
PRM Primary Message: This bit is set in messages from the

initiating primary station.
RES In reserve (not used).
Control field for symmetric transmission (balanced mode)
MSB LSB
1 23
22
2 1
20 Primary to
Control field FCB FCV secondary
DIR PRM station
for symmetric
transmission: Secondary to
0 RES DFC Function primary station
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
The primary station is always the station that causes the transmission of
the message.
The secondary station is always the station that responds to the
message.
Function Type of telegram (e.g. user data, with/without response,
acknowledgment). The meaning of the code is different for
each direction of transmission. See chapter 6.1.2 of the
IEC 60870-5-2 standard for a detailed explanation of the
code.
FCV as in asymmetric transmission
FCB as in asymmetric transmission
DFC as in asymmetric transmission
RES Reserve (not used)
DIR Physical transmission direction:
"1" for message from the control center to the
SICAM eRTU;
"0" for messages from the SICAM eRTU to the control
center

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Address field The address field contains the data link address. This address
constitutes the target address in telegrams from the primary station
(initiating station), and the source address in telegrams from the
secondary station (receiving station).
MSB LSB
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Address field 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
The address in telegrams to all stations (broadcast) is the highest

possible address (255 or 65535).
The length of the address field can be parameterized: 0, 1 or 2 bytes.
11.2.4 User Area in the IEC 60870-5-101 Telegram
The user data area in the telegram consists of:

Telegram ID
Variable structure ID
Cause of transmission
Station address
Information address
Information object
Type ID This field defines structure, type and format of the following information
object. For example, information objects are marked with or without time
by various type identifiers.
MSB LSB
Telegram ID 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
In the SICAM eRTU system, values between 1 and 127 are defined in
monitoring and in control direction in accordance with the following table:
Table 11-3 Telegram objects for process information in monitoring direction
Type ID Type of information object Length of the

Information Object
(in Bytes)
1 Single-point indication 1
2 Single-point indication with time stamp 4

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

Information Object
(in Bytes)
3 Double-point indication 1
4 Double-point indication with time stamp 4
5 Tap position indication 2
6 Tap position indication with time stamp 5
7 Bit pattern, 32-bit 5
8 Bit pattern with time stamp 8
9 Measured value, normalized value 3
10 Measured value, normalized value with time 6

stamp CP24Time2a
11 Measured value, scaled value 3
12 Measured value, scaled value with time 6

stamp CP24Time2a
13 Measured value, short floating point number 5
14 Measured value, shortened floating point 8

number with time stamp CP24Time2a
15 Counter values 5
16 Metered values with time stamp 8

CP24Time2a
17 Event from protection device with time stamp 6

CP24Time2a (not with substation
connection)
18 Blocked pick-up of protection device with 7

time stamp CP24Time2a (not with substation
connection)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

Information Object
(in Bytes)
19 Blocked tripping of protection device with 7

time stamp CP24Time2a
(not with substation connection)

CP56Time2a

CP56Time2a

CP56Time2a
33 Bit pattern with 32 Bit with time stamp 12

CP56Time2a

stamp CP56Time2a

stamp CP56Time2a


CP56Time2a

CP56Time2a
39 Blocked tripping of protection device with 11

40 Blocked trippings of protection device with 11


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-4 Telegram objects for process information in control direction

information object
(in Bytes)
45 Single command 1
46 Double command 1
47 Transformer tap command 1
48 Analog set-point control command, 3

normalized value
51 Digital set-point control command, 32 Bit 4
Table 11-5 Telegram objects for system information in monitoring direction

information object
(in Bytes)
70 End of initialization, always used 1
Table 11-6 Telegram objects for system information in control direction

information object
(in Bytes)
100 (General) scan command 1
101 Counter scan command 1
103 Clock synchronization command 7
104 Check command 2
105 Process reset command 1

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-7 Telegram objects for parameter in control direction

information object
(in Bytes)
110 Parameter for measured value, normalized 3

value
111 Parameter for measured value, scaled value 3
112 Parameter for measured value, shortened 5

floating point number
Variable structure The "Variable structure identifier" field defines the type of addressing and
identifier the number of information elements.
MSB LSB
6 5 4 3 2 1
Variable 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
structure SQ
identifier Number
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Number Number of subsequent information elements
SQ Specifies the type of addressing:
"0" Individual addressing of a single element or each
element of a combination
"1" Only one address for a sequence of information
elements, with the specified address addressing the
first item of information, and the following information
elements being "address + 1".

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Cause of The content of this field specifies the further processing of the information
transmission and controls its forwarding to the user program.
MSB LSB
5 4 3 2 1
Cause of 2 2 2 2 2 20
transmission
T P/N
Cause
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Cause Identifier of the cause of transmission, see Chapter 11-8
P/N Confirmation pos./ neg.: The bit shows the positive or
negative confirmation of a job that was initiated by a user
function.
T Test bit: Identifies messages that are created during test
operation. It is used to allow testing of the transmission
and the devices without influencing the process.
Table 11-8 Causes of transmission in the SICAM eRTU system
Value Cause of transmission
1 Cyclic - basic cycle, time and counter controlled transmission
3 Spontaneous
4 Initialized
6 Activation (used e.g. in control direction for commands)
7 Confirmation of activation (monitoring direction)
8 Cancellation of activation
9 Confirmation of cancellation of activation
10 Conclusion of the activation
11 Feedback, caused by remote command (control center)
12 Feedback, caused by local command
20 Response to general interrogation

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
21...36 Response to group scan 1...16
37 Response to general metered value request
38 Response to scan of metered value group 1
Station address The station address is the same for all information elements of a
telegram.
MSB LSB
Less significant
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 byte
Station
address
215 214 213 212 211 210 29
Most significant
28 byte
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
The respective addresses 255 and 65535 have the meaning "to all
stations" (global address). The length of the station address can be
parameterized: 1 or 2 bytes.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information In the SICAM eRTU system, the information address can contain up to
address three bytes.
The third byte is only used in structured addressing to define a specific
address pattern within a station.
MSB LSB
Less significant
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 byte
Information
address 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28
Most significant
223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 byte
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
The length of the information address can be parameterized: 1 to 3 bytes.
Information object Layout and content of the information object depend on the information
type defined in the "Type identifier" field
(see Chapter 11-3to Table 11-7.
The information object contains
the information
the information status
the time assigned to the information (optional)
The complete information objects are described in IEC 60870-5-101.
The following four examples show the layout of the information object for
Double-point indication with relative time (3 bytes)
Double-point indication with absolute time (7 Byte)
Normalized measured value
Double command

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object of a double-point indication with relative time (3 bytes)
MSB LSB
1
2 20
Information IV NT SB BL RES RES
DPI
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Less significant
byte
Milliseconds
Time value
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 More significant
byte
Milliseconds
25 24 23 22 21 20
IV RES
Minutes
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

DPI Double-point indication
BL Blocked / not blocked: The value of the information
object is blocked for transmission. Blocking and
unblocking can be performed by an on-site controller,
for example.
SB Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by an
operate or automatically.
NT Not topical / topical: A value is topical if the latest
update was successful.
IV Invalid / valid: A value is valid if it was correctly acquired
by the acquire function.
Milliseconds Value: 0 ... 59 999 ms (includes seconds)
Minutes Value: 0 ... 59 min

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object of a double-point indication with absolute time (7

bytes)
MSB LSB
1
2 20
DPI
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Milliseconds
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28
Milliseconds 0..59 999 ms
25 24 23 22 21 20
Time value IV RES
Minutes 0..59 min
24 23 22 21 20
SU RES
Hours 0..23 hours
22 21 20 24 23 22 21 20 1..31 days
Day of the week Day of month 1..7 days
23 22 21 20
RES
Months 1..12 months
26 25 24 23 22 21 20
RES
Years 0..99 years
7
Bit 2 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

for example.
operate or automatically.
IV Invalid / valid: The value is valid if it was correctly
acquired by the acquire function.
<0>: valid
<1>: invalid
SU <0>: standard time
<1>: daylight-saving time

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object for a normalized measured value
MSB LSB
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
byte
Measured Measured value
value
byte
VZ Measured value
Status IV NT SB BL RES RES RES OV
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Measured value Normalized measured value
S Sign: Negative measured values are transmitted as
a two’s complement.
OV No overflow / overflow: The value of the information
object is outside a predefined value range.
unblocking can be performed by an on-site
controller, for example.
SB Replaced / not replaced: The value was specified by
an operate or automatically.
IV Invalid / valid: A value is valid if it was correctly

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object of a double command
MSB LSB
4 3 2 1 0 1
Information 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
S/B
and status QU DCS
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

DCS Double Command State:
<0>: not permissible (fault position)
<1>: OFF position
<2>: ON position
QU Command qualifier:
<0>: Free time qualifier
<1>: Short command output time (e.g. for circuit breakers)
<2>: Long command output time (e.g. for isolator control)
<3>: Persistent command
<4>...<15>: Not assigned
<16>...<32>: Command output times permanently
parameterized for all commands of a
SICAM eRTU
S/E Select / Execute:
<0>: Information is output immediately
<1>: Command is activated by separate instruction
11.2.5 Transmission Procedures of the IEC 60870-5-T101 Telegram

Structure
The functions for communication with the control center are handled by
defined transmission procedures. Two important procedures are
described below in an exemplary way:
Startup of the SICAM eRTU
Basic services: Send, Send / Confirm and Request / Respond
See standard IEC 60870-5-2 for a detailed description of the procedures.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Startup procedure After a restart of the SICAM eRTU during running operation (e.g.,
of the SICAM eRTU switching the SICAM eRTU on for commissioning/service work), the link
to the control center must be reestablished. The procedure for this is
shown in the following figure.
Control Center SICAM eRTU
(e.g. command,Order to eRTU Startup of eRTU

GI, scan) No response:
Link layer (e.g. switch
is not available, on)
Time monitoring triggered is reset or
repetitions switched off
End of startup: Channel is available
Link initialization:
Status message to control center
Startup of the eRTU is recognized:
Triggering synchronization
of data link layer
Normalize data link layer
and acknowledge
ACK (Next sequential telegram bit
= "1" expected)
Control center is synchronized
Scan status
of data link layer
Status of data link
layer is reported
Triggering synchronization
of data link layer
Normalize data link layer
and acknowledge
eRTU synchronized
eRTU reports end of initialization

eRTU is available after startup.
Following functions:
- General interrogation
- Clock synchronization
- Repetition of job
suc217.wmf
Fig. 11-8 Startup procedure in symmetric mode
Cycle monitoring or an unconfirmed job tells the control center that the
link to the SICAM eRTU has broken down. After a defined number of
repetitions, the control center tries in defined intervals to re-establish the
link by repeatedly transmitting the "Scan of the state of the link layer". If
the link to the SICAM eRTU becomes available again, the SICAM eRTU
responds with the status of the data link layer. The control center and the
SICAM eRTU now synchronize their links.
After startup of the SICAM eRTU and the data link layer has been
synchronized, the SICAM eRTU reports "end of initialization".

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Basic services in In symmetric transmission mode, one dedicated transmission channel

symmetric mode each is provided in monitoring and in control direction. Telegrams are
transmitted directly on these channels depending on their priority.
For this direct transmission there are basic services, three of which are
illustrated in the following figure:
Primary station Secondary station

Send / without confirmation
Data acquisition Sending

Receive Further processing
Send / confirmation
Data acquisition Sending

Acknowl.
Request / respond
Application Scan
Response Process feedback

Further processing Receive
suc218.wmf
Fig. 11-9 Basic routines for data communication using the IEC 60870-5-T101
telegram structure

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
In monitoring direction the SICAM eRTU can use:

Send / no confirmation
Used to transmit cyclic telegrams. A confirmation is not necessary
because a corrupted telegram is contained again in the next cycle.
Send / Confirm
Provided for transmission of all spontaneous and organizational
telegrams. The SICAM eRTU keeps each block in the telegram buffer
until an acknowledge message (usually a single character) confirms
that it has been correctly received.
In control direction the control center can use:
Send / no confirmation
Provided for cyclic transmission of setpoint
Send / Confirm
Provided for the transmission of all commands and organizational
telegrams to the SICAM eRTU. The SICAM eRTU confirms (usually
with a single character).
Request / respond
This procedure can be used to scan lists in the SICAM eRTU. The
SICAM eRTU replies to a scan command by transmitting the
telegrams contained in the scanned list.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.2.6 Safety functions
Timeout for A telegram that is transmitted by a primary station and must be confirmed
acknowledgments by the partner (secondary station) is repeated after a settable interval if
the confirmation telegram has not been received by then (timeout). The
time monitoring begins when the primary telegram is sent and the send
pause (33 characters) has expired.
The time interval for the timeout depends on the reaction time of the
remote station and the maximum transmission time for the response
telegram (short record or single character).
The number of transmission attempts in case of a timeout can be
parameterized: a parameter value 2, for instance, means that a first
telegram is repeated once if no response is received. Failing a response
to this second attempt, the station signals a pulse error and switches to
cyclic scan of the link layer state.
Channel The transmission channel is monitored by the send/confirm procedure.

monitoring There may, however, be pauses during which no telegrams or only
telegrams in Send / no reply mode are transmitted. To ensure continuous
monitoring of the channels, a channel monitoring time can be
parameterized. The monitoring time is started each time a confirm
message is received from the partner.
If no telegrams have been sent up to the expiration of this monitoring
time, a test record is sent to the remote station. Failing a timely
acknowledgment to this check block, and of a parameterized number of
repeated check blocks, the station signals a check block error and a
pulse error.
When the remote station responds again, its data link layer is reset and
normalized again (see Figure 11-8). After successful synchronization,
the check block error and the pulse error signal are canceled.
Status scan When a channel malfunction or a buffer overflow has occurred because
a remote station (DFC) has sent too many telegrams in too short a time,
a status scan is sent cyclically to the partner.
Check command If the check command is activated, the SICAM eRTU acknowledges with
a short block the check command that is cyclically transmitted by the
control center. The control center monitors the arrival of this
acknowledgment with a check command cycle time.
As a rule, the check command is only used in balanced transmission
mode.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The IEC 60870-5-104 telegram is pulse-code modulated and is based on

the ISO-OSI-layer model for open systems, 5 layers however are
sufficient:
Physical layer (layer 1)
PPP layer (layer 2)
Internet layer (layer 3)
Transport layer (layer 4)
Application layer (layer 7)
Physical layer This physical layer handles the following tasks:

Galvanic isolation (2.5kV)
Bit synchronisation
Connect the lines to the control centers at the two 25-pole ports X1/X2
X1 and X2 can be parameterized as
V.24/V.28 interface - asynchronous

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
PPP layer The PPP layer handles the following tasks:

Telegram synchronisation
Protecting the telegrams against loss and failure by creating and
checking check codes
Masking / unmasking of control characters
Internet layer The internet layer handles the networking of data packets in the network
(IP) (routing).
Transport layer The transport layer takes on the end-to-end protection of the data
(TCP) exchange against:
Failure of data packets
Duplication of data packets
Exchanging the order
Data errors
Application layer Identification and handling of telegram information occurs in the

application layer. Its main tasks are:
Variable structure recognition
Command management

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Two telegram types are used as IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams:

Telegram with user area
Telegram without user area
Each telegram contains a control field with four bytes length. There are
the following three control field variants:
Control field for information transmission with numbering (telegram
with user area)
Control field for monitoring with numbering (telegram without user
area)
Control field for test purposes without numbering (Telegram without
user area)
The following picture shows the layout of the telegram types.
Telegram with Telegram without

Application Area Application Area
Start char. = 68hex Header Start char. = 68hex Header
Protection Protection
Block length Block length
Header Header
Control field Control field Control field Control field
control control
Telegram ID
Var. struct. recognition
Transmission
Cause of
Station address
User
area
Information
address
Information
object
suc216b.wmf
Fig. 11-10 Layout of IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams in the SICAM eRTU system

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Start character The start character always has the value 68 hex and is a component
of the telegram protection.
Block length The block length box specifies the byte number of the user area plus the
link control header (4 bytes). The value can be up to 253.
If 2 bytes are added to the content of the block length field (security
header), the telegram length results.
11.3.3 Link Control in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram
The link control header consists of the control field and has a length of 4
bytes. The three possible types of control fields are:
Control field for information transmission telegrams
Control field for monitoring telegrams
Control field for test telegrams
Control field A telegram for information transmission is defined in the control field by
Information a 0 in octet 1, bt 0.
transmission
Bit 1 to 7 of octet 1 and all bits of octet 2 contain the number of the
transmission order.
Bit 1 to 7 of octet 3 and all bits of octet 4 contain the number of the receive
order.
MSB LSB
26 25 24 23 22 21 20
0 Octet 1
Number of transmit order
214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27
Octet 2
Control field Number of transmit order
for information
transmission 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
0 Octet 3
Number receive order
214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27
Octet 4
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Control field A telegram for monitoring is defined by a 1 in octet 1, bit 0 and a 0in octet
Monitoring 1, bit 1.
Bit 1 to 7 of octet 3 and all bits of octet 4 contain the number of the receive
order.
MSB LSB
0 0 1 Octet 1
0 Octet 2
Control field
for monitoring 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
0 Octet 3
214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27
Octet 4
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Control field A telegram for test purposes is defined in the control field as follows.
Test purposes
For each telegram only one each of the functions TESTFR, STOPDT or
STARTDT may be used.
MSB LSB
21 20 21 20 21 20
1 1 Octet 1
TESTFR STOPDT STARTDT
Control field
0 Octet 2
for test
purposes
0 0 Octet 3
0 Octet 4
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
TESTFR Specifies a test telegram used for checking the

(Test Frame) connection. A station sends a test telegram with TESTFR
= act and the receiver station responds with TESTFR =
con.
20 = <1> and 21 = <0>: TESTFR = act (active)
20 = <0> and 21 = <1>: TESTFR = con (confirmed)
STARTDT Specifies a telegram which starts a data transmission. A

(Start Data station sends a telegram with STARTDT = act and the
Transfer) receiver station responds with STARTDT = con.
20 = <1> and 21 = <0>: STARTDT = act (active)
20 = <0> and 21 = <1>: STARTDT = con (confirmed)
STOPDT Specifies a telegram which terminates a data

(Stop Data transmission. A station sends a telegram with STOPDT =
Transfer) act and the receiver station responds with STOPDT =
con.
20 = <1> and 21 = <0>: STOPDT = act (active)
20 = <0> and 21 = <1>: STOPDT = con (confirmed)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.3.4 User Area in the IEC 60870-5-104 Telegram
The user area in the telegram consists of

Telegram ID
Variable structure ID
Cause of transmission
Station address
Information address
Information object
Type ID This field defines structure, type and format of the following information
object. E.g., information objects with or without time are marked by
different type IDs.
MSB LSB
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Telegram ID 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
When the telegram IEC 60870-5-104 is used in monitoring and control

direction, the following values are defined in the SICAM eRTU system:
Type ID Type of information object Length

of the information
object (in bytes)
1 Single-point indication 1
3 Double-point indication 1
5 Tap position indication 2
7 Bit pattern of 32 bit 5
9 Measured value, normalized value 3
11 Measured value, scaled value 3
13 Measured value, short floating point number 5
15 Metered values 5

CP56Time2a

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

of the information
object (in bytes)

CP56Time2a

CP56Time2a
33 Bit pattern with 32 bit with time stamp 12

CP56Time2a

stamp CP56Time2a

stamp CP56Time2a


CP56Time2a

CP56Time2a
39 Blocked pick-up of protection device with 11

40 Blocked trip of protection device with time 11

stamp CP56Time2a

of the information
object (in bytes)
45 Single command 1
46 Double command 1
47 Transformer tap command 1

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

of the information
object (in bytes)

normalized value
49 Analog set-point control command, scaled 3

value

shortened floating point number
51 Digital set-point control command, 32 bit 4
58 Single command with time stamp 8

CP56Time2a
59 Double command with time stamp 8

CP56Time2a
60 Tap position command with time stamp 8

CP56Time2a

normalized value with time stamp
CP56Time2a
62 Analog set-point control command, scaled 10

value
with time stamp CP56Time2a
63 Analog set-point control command, short 12

floating point number with time stamp
CP56Time2a
64 Digital set-point control command, 32 bit with 11


E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-11 Telegram objects for system information in monitoring direction

of the information
object (in bytes)
70 End of initialization, always used 1
Table 11-12 Telegram objects for system information in control direction

of the information
object (in bytes)
100 (General) scan command 1
101 Counter scan command 1
102 Read command (only address without 0

information)
103 Clock synchronization command 7
105 Process reset command 1
107 Test command with time stamp CP56Time2a 9
Table 11-13 Telegram objects for parameter in control direction

of the information
object (in bytes)
110 Parameter for measured value, normalized 3

value
111 Parameter for measured value, scaled value 3
112 Parameter for measured value, shortened 5

floating point number

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Variable structure The Variable structure identifier field defines the addressing type and
identifier the number of the information elements.
MSB LSB
6 5 4 3 2 1
Variable 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
structure SQ
identifier Number
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Number Number of subsequent information elements
SQ Specifies the type of addressing:
"0" Individual addressing of a single element or each
element
of a combination
"1" Only one address for a sequence of information
elements, with the specified address addressing the
first item of information, and the following information
elements being "address + 1".

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Cause of The content of this field specifies the further processing of the information
transmission and controls its forwarding to the user program.
MSB LSB
5 4 3 2 1
Cause of 2 2 2 2 2 20
transmission
T P/N
Cause
Identifier of 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
cause of
transmission Identifier
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Identifier Identifier of the cause of transmission (is zero if it is not
used)
Cause Cause of transmission, see Chapter 11-14
P/N Confirmation pos./ neg.: The bit shows the positive or
negative confirmation of a job that was initiated by a user
function.
T Test bit: Identifies messages that are created during test
operation. It is used to allow testing of the transmission
and the devices without influencing the process.
1 Cyclic - basic cycle, time and counter controlled transmission
3 Spontaneous
4 Initialized
6 Activation (used e.g. in control direction for commands)
7 Confirmation of activation (monitoring direction)
8 Cancellation of activation
9 Confirmation of cancellation of activation
10 Conclusion of the activation
11 Feedback, caused by remote command (control center)
12 Feedback, caused by local command

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
20 Response to general interrogation
21...36 Response to group scan 1...16
37 Response to general metered value request
Station address The station address is the same for all information elements of a
telegram.
MSB LSB
Less significant
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 byte
Station
address
215 214 213 212 211 210 29
Most significant
28 byte
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Address 65535 means "to all stations" (i.e., global address). The length
of the station address must be set to 2 bytes in
IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information
address
MSB LSB
Less significant
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 byte
Information
address 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28
Most significant
223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 byte
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
The length of the information address must be set to 3 bytes in

IEC 60870-5-104 telegrams.
Information object Layout and content of the information object depend on the information
type defined in the "Type identifier" field
(see Chapter 11-9to Table 11-132).
The information object contains:
the information
the information status
The following four examples show the layout of the information object for
Double-point indication without time (1 byte)
Double-point indication with absolute time (7 byte)
Normalized measured value
Double command

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object of a double-point indication without time (1 byte)
MSB LSB
1
2 20
DPI
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

for example.
operator or automatically.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object of a double-point indication with absolute time (7

bytes)
MSB LSB
1
2 20
DPI
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Milliseconds
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28
Milliseconds 0..59 999 ms
25 24 23 22 21 20
Time value IV RES
Minutes 0..59 min
24 23 22 21 20
SU RES
Hours 0..23 hours
22 21 20 24 23 22 21 20 1..31 days
Day of the week Day of month 1..7 days
23 22 21 20
RES
Months 1..12 months
26 25 24 23 22 21 20
RES
Years 0..99 years
7
Bit 2 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

for example.
IV Invalid / valid: The value is valid if it was correctly
<0>: valid
<1>: invalid
SU <0>: standard time
<1>: daylight-saving time

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object for a normalized measured value
MSB LSB
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
byte
Measured Measured value
value
byte
VZ Measured value
Status IV NT SB BL RES RES RES OV
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Measured value Normalized measured value
S Sign: Negative measured values are transmitted as a
two’s complement.
OV No overflow / overflow: The value of the information
object is outside a predefined value range.
for example.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Information object of a double command
MSB LSB
4 3 2 1 0 1
Information 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
S/B
and status QU DCS
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

DCS Double Command State:
<1>: OFF position
<2>: ON position
QU Command qualifier:
<0>: Free time qualifier
<1>: Short command output time (e.g. for circuit breakers)
<2>: Long command output time (e.g. for isolator control)
<3>: Persistent command
<4>...<15>: Not assigned
<16>...<32>: Command output times permanently
parameterized for all commands of a
SICAM eRTU
S/E Select / Execute:
<0>: Information is output immediately
<1>: Command is activated by separate instruction

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.3.5 Differences to the IEC60870-5-101 Telegram
Mode For the IEC60870-5-104 telegram there is no difference between the

symmetrical and asymmetrical transmission procedure.
The transmission procedure corresponds to the symmetrical
transmission procedure, although this term is not used.
The data transmission is always released by the central station.
Addressing Addressing on connection level is performed by the internet and transport

layers.
The protocol control information is covered by the APCI (Application
Protocol Control Information).
Telegram security Telegram protection against loss or reproduction is provided by the

internet and transport layers.
Time stamp The only information objects used are those without time stamp or with
absolute time stamp.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.4 Control Center Link with the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram
The SINAUT 8-FW telegram structure is a bit-serial transmission

procedure with an efficient data structure adapted to the process for
increased safety and reliability of transmission paths subjected to
interference.
The SINAUT 8-FW telegram offers the following modulation procedures:
Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM)
11.4.1 Pulse Duration Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram
The advantage of this type of modulation (see annex 11.1.1) is thanks to

monitoring of the telegram character duration
synchronization of each character edge
monitoring of the number of telegram characters
an increased safety.
The telegram transmission speed is identical for control and monitoring
directions and can be parameterized from 100 to 1200 bits/s.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Telegram Layout A SINAUT 8-FW telegram consists of the following:

Address portion (see Chapter 11.4.2)
Information portion (see Chapter 11.4.3)
Telegram security
1. 1st character SINAUT 8-FW telegram Last character
Address portion Information portion Security portion
24 or 32 characters 9,16, 36 oder 72 characters
PP: Supplement of pause-

Bit sequence on the line d=2 long characters to odd
0 PP IP IP: Supplement of pulse-
long characters to odd
d=4
0 x9 +x7 + x5 + x3 +x2 +1
d=6
0 x16 + x14 +x11 + x10 +x9 + x7 + x5 +x3 +x +1
Linear, systematic
Blank security code
character (in acc. with Bose Chaudhuri)
suc219.wmf
Fig. 11-11 Layout of a SINAUT 8-FW telegram (DPDM)
Telegram The security portion protects the entire telegram with a Hamming
security distance of d = 2, 4, or 6. The parameterizable security characters are
transferred with the telegram.
Figure 11-11 shows the number of security characters and their contents.
11.4.2 Address Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram
The address portion identifies the information contained in the telegram.

It provides information on the source, destination and length of the
telegram.
MSB LSB
26 25 24 23 22 21 20
1st byte TGE
Station number
21 20 ÜB 24 23 22 21 20
2nd byte
Data class TFK number
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
3rd byte
Telegram number (low)
5 4
2 2 23 22 21 20 29 28
4th byte
System number Record length Tel. no.
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Station No. <0> for asymmetric transmission:

Address "to all SICAM eRTUs"
For symmetric transmission:
Station address SICAM eRTU 0
<1>...<127> Binary coded for identification of SICAM
eRTUs 1 to 127.
When the symmetric transmission procedure (point-to-
point communication) is used, the station number can be
parameterized for sender and receiver on the SICAM
eRTU. When the asymmetric transmission procedure is
used, this parameterization is mandatory since it
identifies the origin of the telegrams and is evaluated by
the control center.
TGE Telegram group end (TGE)

<1>Identifies the last telegram of a SICAM eRTU in the
cycle during the asymmetric transmission procedure (i.e.,
polling).
TFK No. Telegram sequence identifier (TFK), binary-coded

<0> TFK in telegrams of the control direction;
Not permitted in monitoring direction
<1>...<30> TFK for spontaneous and organizational
telegrams from the SICAM eRTU to the control center
<31> After startup, the SICAM eRTU transfers this TFK
no. to tell the control center that the SICAM eRTU has
started up.
ÜB Overflow of the TFK (e.g., control direction
malfunction which prevents TFK acknowledgment)
Data class Data class

<0> Organizational telegram
<1> Spontaneous telegram
<2> Cyclic telegram
<3> Scanned telegram
Telegram number Telegram number, binary-coded

<0>...<1023> Telegram numbers for identification of 1
byte of information each (i.e., maximum of 8192
information characters can be addressed per
transmission direction and per SICAM eRTU)
Record length <0>...<7> Identifies the number of bytes in the

information portion (see Chapter 11.4.3)
Bit position 2° of the record length is used as the
"compression bit".
System No. <0>...<7> Is used to expand the address area.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.4.3 Information Portion of the SINAUT 8-FW Telegram
The information portion contains the actual process data and consists
(for DPDM telegrams) of 9, 16, 62 or 72 characters of information
depending on the type of telegram. Spontaneous information is usually
scanned in short telegram types or cyclically transmitted in long telegram
types.
Eight digital process indications are combined in the SINAUT 8-FW
telegram structure into one byte of information (i.e., indication byte). This
byte is then identified by a common address (i.e., telegram number). This
address is not bound to a certain area. It can be parameterized as
desired.
The following table shows the telegram structure for the types of
information available. See the description of SINAUT telegram screens
(E50400-U0055-U500-A1) for a complete presentation of all information
portions.
Table 11-15 Formats available for SINAUT 8-FW telegrams in control direction
Telegram type Telegram Number of Record Addres

Designation Single length s jump
Elements
Single command SB 1 8 0 0 0 1
Single command with param. switching direction SB 1 8 0 0 0 1
Double command SB 1 4 0 0 0 1
Double command with param. switching direction SB 1 4 0 0 0 1
8-bit analog setpoint with sign SB 2 1 0 1 1 2
8-bit digital setpoint SB 5 1 0 1 0 1

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-16 Formats available for SINAUT 8-FW telegrams in monitoring direction
Telegram type Telegram Number of Record Addres

Designation Single length s jump
Elements
Bit pattern, 8 bits ÜB1 4 1 0 0 4
Single-point indication, 1 bytes ÜB3 8 0 1 0 1
Double-point indication, 1 bytes UB3 4 0 1 0 1
Double-point indication, 4 bytes ÜB4 16 1 0 0 4
Double-point indication, 8 bytes ÜB5 32 1 1 0 8
Indications, 1 byte real-time, resolution 10 ms ÜB6a 8 1 0 1 1
Indications, 1 byte real-time, resolution 1 ms ÜB6b 8 1 1 0 1
1 measured value, 8 bits + sign ÜB7 1 0 1 1 2
4 measured values, 8 bits + sign ÜB8 4 1 0 1 8
Fleeting or short-time indication, 4 bytes ÜB12 32 1 0 0 4
Fleeting or short-time indication, real-time with ÜB13a 8 1 0 1 1

10 ms resolution
Fleeting or short-time indication, real-time with ÜB13b 8 1 0 1 1

1 ms resolution
4 transformer taps, BCD or binary coded ÜB14 4 1 0 0 4
1 metered value, BCD coded with 7 decades ÜB15 1 1 0 0 4
1 metered value, binary coded with 28 bits ÜB16 1 1 0 0 4

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
The following examples show the layout of the information portion for:
Indication type of telegram (4 bytes plus 1 byte with time)
Measured value type of telegram (8 bits + sign and 11 bits + sign)
Switching command type of telegram
Indication type of Two examples of this type of telegram are shown below.
telegram
Information portion with 4 bytes
Information portion with 1 byte and time
Information portion with 4 bytes
MSB LSB
E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
Information
Information
E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E11 E10 E9
Information
E24 E23 E22 E21 E20 E19 E18 E17
Information
E32 E31 E30 E29 E28 E27 E26 E25
Information
0 0 0 0
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
information Image of the information byte containing the

process change
In double-point indications, all odd number inputs
correspond to OFF and all even number inputs
correspond to ON.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Informations portion with 1 byte and timet
MSB LSB
E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
Information
Information
Ä8 Ä7 Ä6 Ä5 Ä4 Ä3 Ä2 Ä1
Change
Change
7 6 5
2 2 2 24 23 22 21 20
Time val. (low)
Time (less sig.) x 10 ms
Time val. 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28

(high)
Time (more sig.) x 10 ms
A B C D
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
information Image of the information byte containing the process

change
Change Identifies the process inputs which caused the

spontaneous transmission.
Time <0>...<59,999> Absolute partial time with a resolution of

10 ms (corresponds to 9 min. and 59.99 s)
A Free
B Free
C Not synchronized
D Not real time

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Measrured value Two examples of this type of telegram are shown below.
type of telegram
Measured value, 8 bits + sign

In SICAM eRTU the measured value coding is 12 bit + sign.
However, in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram only resolutions of 8 bit + sign
are transmitted.
MSB LSB
Measured 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
value
Measured value
VZ
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Explanation of the contents of the field:
Measured value <-4096>...<+4095>: See manual of the "Analog Input

Function Module AI32/16" for the ranges of measured
values which can be represented and their assignment to
current and voltage values.
VZ Sign
Negative measured values are represented in two's
complement.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

The measured value coding in the SICAM eRTU system is 12 bit + sign.
However, in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram only resolutions of 11 bit + sign
are transmitted.
This type of telegram can also be parameterized with 72 information
characters (i.e., 4 measured values + sign).
MSB LSB
2 4
2 3
2 2
21
2 0 0 0 0
Measured Measured value (less significant byte)

value 1
VZ 211 210 29 28 27 26 25
Measured value (more significant byte)
24 23 22 21 20 0 0 0
Measured Measured value (less significant byte)

value 2
VZ 211 210 29 28 27 26 25
Measured value (more significant byte)
0 0 0 0
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Measured value <-4096>...<+4095>: See manual of the "Analog Input

Function Module AI32/16" for the ranges of measured
values which can be represented and their assignment to
current and voltage values.
VZ Sign
Negative measured values are represented in two's
complement.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Switching
command type
of telegram MSB LSB
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
Information
Information
22 21 20 23 22 21 20
Time val. (low) PB
BK ZK
7 6 5 4 3 2
Bit 2 2 2 2 2 2 21 20
information The set information characters are output to the process.

In double commands, the odd number outputs
correspond to OFF and all even number outputs
correspond to ON.
ZK Time identifier, binary-coded

<0> Short time (e.g., for circuit breakers)
<8> Long time (e.g., for isolator control)
The time assigned to these three identifiers can be
parameterized separately for each command.
All other time identifiers can also be parameterized with
fixed values (i.e., the same value for all commands).
BK Command identifier, binary-coded

<0> Switching command
<1> Continuous command (continuous output)
<6> Automatic reclosing
PB Parity bit
Supplements the number of long characters of all 6 bytes
(address and information portion) so that it becomes an
odd number.
This parity bit is also used in addition to the check
characters for telegram security.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.4.4 Organizational Telegrams
Included in the SINAUT 8-FW telegram structure are a wide variety of

organizational functions which are characteristic of this powerful
telegram structure.
The following table shows the functions triggered in the SICAM eRTU by
the control center with organizational telegrams.
Table 11-17 Organizational telegrams in control direction
Telegram type Telegram Block No.

Designation
Check command SO1 512
Message repetition request/TFK positive SO2 513

acknowledgment
Startup acknowledgment command SO3 514
Reset command SO4 519
Single scan command SO5 520
Group scan command SO6 521
Switch on telegram for time list SO10 525
Switch off telegram for time list SO11 526
Synchronization of the precise time SO16 770_S
Setting of calendar SO18 770_K
Switching addresses in lists on or off SO19 771

(Measured value selection)
Scan of error bit pattern SO24 781
Polling command SO32 1)
1) The polling command has its own telegram format (see page 5-44).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Organizational The following table shows the organizational functions of the

Telegrams SICAM eRTU in monitoring direction.
(contd.)
Table 11-18 Organizational telegrams in monitoring direction
Telegram type Telegram Block No.

Designation
Check block ÜO1 512
Ackn. telegram "Synchronization" ÜO7 770_S
Ackn. telegram "Set calendar" ÜO9 770_k
Error bit pattern transfer (IFBIT) ÜO13 781
Operation bit pattern (ZBBIT) ÜO16 1016
Block command The control center can output check commands cyclically to the
(block no. 512) SICAM eRTU to monitor the transmission paths and the function of the
SICAM eRTU. These commands are received by the SICAM eRTU,
identified and returned to the control center as check telegrams with the
same telegram number and the same information portion. Monitoring is
handled by the control center.
Telegram Every spontaneous, organizational or scanned telegram sent by the

repetition SICAM eRTU is supplied with a telegram sequence identification number
(block No. 513) (TFK) incremented by 1 (number range 1 to 30).
The control center monitors the sequence to determine whether it is
complete. Missing telegrams are specifically requested by the control
center with specification of the telegram sequence identifier number. All
spontaneous telegrams arriving while the request is running must be
stored intermediately in the control center. After the request has been
concluded successfully, the spontaneous telegrams are sorted in
ascending order of their telegram sequence identifier numbers, and
processed further in that order.
This procedure achieves the following:
Spontaneous telegrams which have not been received are detected
and then specifically requested.
A request occurs immediately after the transmission path becomes
clear again.
The order of the telegrams can be reproduced, and distortion of
information output by the control center cannot occur (as long as an
overflow of the telegram sequence identifiers does not occur).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Startup After a startup, the SICAM eRTU sends all telegrams with the telegram
acknowledgement sequence identifier number 31. Based on this telegram sequence
(block no. 514) identifier number, the control center recognizes the startup of the
SICAM eRTU, and responds with a startup acknowledgment command.
In the SICAM eRTU, this startup acknowledgment command triggers the
spontaneous transmission of the error bit pattern (telegram no. 781) with
the telegram sequence identifier number 1 and with this the continued
counting of the telegram sequence identifier.
Reset command A remote reset command from the control center causes an internal reset
(block no. 519) of the MCP communications processor followed by a restart.
Single scan In the SICAM eRTU, the single scan command from the control center
command triggers the one-time transmission of the telegram number contained in
(block no. 520) the information block of the telegram.
For example, the single scan command can be used by the control center
to specifically request telegrams not received during a general check.
Group scan In the SICAM eRTU, a group scan command from the control center
command triggers the one-time transmission of the scan list contained in the
(block no. 521) information block of the telegram. The telegram addresses in the scan
lists were set during parameterization. Scan lists are available for
indications, counting values or measured values. The information can be
mixed as desired. All telegram addresses stored in the activated list are
transferred.
Four lists are available when asymmetric transmission mode is used.
Switch lists on and In the SICAM eRTU, this command from the control center causes the
off requested list to be switched on or off. All telegram addresses
(block Nos. 525 + 526) parameterized in this list are transferred until the list is switched off again.
Time setting or If the SICAM eRTU does not have an external synchronization pulse and
synchronization no separate WT channel is available for a synchronization pulse, the
telegram SICAM eRTU can only be synchronized via a time setting or
(block No. 770) synchronization telegram.
Due to the 1-ms time resolution of the SICAM eRTU, the format of this
telegram is not standard. The telegram is always transferred periodically
at full "tens-minutes". The entire time in the SICAM eRTU is set again.
The time in the telegram applies to the starting edge of the telegram. This
makes synchronization independent of the transmission speed.
Measured value Measured value selection permits the control center to activate or inhibit
selection transmission of specific measured value telegram addresses. The basic
(block no. 771) cycle list on the MCP communications processor is expanded
dynamically for the duration of the measured value selection.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Error bit pattern The error bit bar is a tool for detecting control center errors. Each
(block no. 781) parameterized, system-specific error or error relevant for the system
management is entered here on its occurrence at the bit location
assigned to it. Errors are collected in the error bit pattern starting at the
time they were last acknowledged/deleted.
There are three ways to access the error bit pattern of the SICAM eRTU:
Startup of SICAM eRTU
After receipt of the startup acknowledgment telegram from the control
center, the SICAM eRTU performs a spontaneous, one-time
transmission of the error bit pattern to the control center and then deletes
it automatically.
Interrogation / deletion by the control center
The error bit pattern of the SICAM eRTU can always be scanned and
deleted, if required, using the scan command (telegram no. 781).
The error bit bar has the following telegram structure (also relevant for
the system bit bar):
MSB LSB
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Error bits
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Error bits
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Error bits
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Error bits
0 0 0 0
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Error bits The assignment of the error bits is identical with the
system bit pattern and is specified by the
parameterization of the system bit pattern.
A sample assignment of the error bits is shown in
Table 11-19.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Operation bit The operation bit pattern indicates the current status of pending errors.
pattern Errors provoking a SICAM eRTU restart are not marked in the operation
(block no. 1016) bit pattern.
Like in the error bit pattern, a bit position is also reserved in the operation
bit pattern for the status of each event. A bit remains set as long as the
error persists.
The operation bit pattern is spontaneously transmitted to the control
center in case of each change of a system status message. In addition to
this, it can be transmitted in the basic cycle, in interrogation lists or via an
individual request.
The assignment of the operation bit pattern can be parameterized by the
user. This parameterization also specifies the error bit pattern.
In the following table you find a proposal with regard to the assignment
of the operation bit pattern.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-19 Assignment of the operation bit pattern (proposal)
Error Error bit Text in Meaning RE/

identifi- 1
) SICAM plusTOOLS FE from 2)m
cation
1 2 M_Input_malfunc Message input disturbed RE/ S7_CPU(GF)

FE
2 3 MV_Input_malfunc Measured value input RE/ S7_CPU(GF)

malfunction FE
3 4 B_Output_malfunc Process output malfunction RE/ S7_CPU(GF)

FE
7 8 Pulse Error Pulse error, control direction RE TC Channel
8 9 Channel Error Channel Error RE/ TC Channel

FE
12 13 Telegram in receive Received telegram RE TC Channel

direction overwritten
13 14 Full-cyclic transmission Cyclic operation (Full cycle is RE/ TC Channel

running running) FE
15 16 Process output malfunc Process output malfunction RE TC Channel

(at MCP)
16 17 Command not executed Command not executed RE TC Channel
19 20 Chatter_inhibit_activ Contact chatter (System RE/ S7_CPU(GF)

error) FE
21 22 Time_invalid Time invalid (at time RE/ MCP

management DCF) FE
25 26 Telegr_mem_Warn_limi Telegram memory warning RE/ TC Channel

t limit FE
26 27 Telegr_mem_Overflow Telegram memory overflow RE TC Channel
28 29 No signaling voltage Indication device malfunction RE/ S7_CPU(GF)

(Signaling voltage missing) FE
29 30 I0_0 Fuse fault RE/ CR

FE
30 31 I0_7 Transmission level error RE/ CR

FE
1)
Error bits which are not listed are not assigned
2) GF = Group fault

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Polling command In addition to the point-to-point and multiple point-to-point transmission

(only available with modes, in which the substation is directly connected to the control center
modulation mode by a transmission channel, there is the so-called line configuration (see
DPDM) Chapter 11.1.2). In this configuration, the data are transmitted from the
substation to the control center in master/slave mode. This procedure is
referred to as multi-point traffic or polling mode.
A short "Polling command" telegram is used to poll the individual
SICAM eRTUs:
MSB LSB
20 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
Information
About Station number
IP PP 23 22 21
Time val. (low)
Protection information
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Station Can be parameterized (1 to 127)
number
Information Bit Position Function
23 22 21 20
0 0 0 0 Quick check (see Chapter 11.4.6)
0 0 0 1 Quick scan (see Chapter 11.4.6)
0 0 1 0 Scan list 1
0 0 1 1 Scan list 2
0 1 0 0 Scan list 3
0 1 0 1 Scan list 4
1 0 1 0 Startup, general interrogation
Protection Telegram security with d=2 (one pause and pulse parity
character each)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.4.5 Pulse Code Modulated SINAUT 8-FW Telegram
The pulse code modulated SINAUT 8-FW telegram (see Chapter 11.1.1)
has a data frame based on DIN 19244 and is always used in operating
mode "send/without confirmation". The telegram structure uses the
"variable length" type of telegram. It has its own monitoring routines (e.g.,
telegram sequence identification and test record) to check for
transmission and data loss.
The address and information portion corresponds to the layout of the
pulse duration modulated telegram. See Chapter 11.4.2 to Chapter
11.4.4 for more details.
Telegram security uses a checksum byte and corresponds to a Hamming
distance of d = 4.
The transmission speed can be set separately for the control direction
and the monitoring direction. Transmission rates of 50 bits/sec to 38400
bits/sec can be set.
Start char. = 68hex

Block length
Header
Block length
Start char. = 68hex
Address portion
User
area
Information portion
Check sum
End char. = 16hex
suc221.wmf
Fig. 11-12 Layout of a pulse code modulated SINAUT8-FW telegram

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.4.6 Multi-Point Transmission SINAUT 8-FW Telegram
Quick check / quick In asymmetric communication systems, the quick check procedure is
scan (only available used to speed up the transmission of spontaneous process events in the
with telegram control center.
structure DPDM
Control Center SICAM eRTU

Case 1: No events in any SICAM eRTUs
Global scan
QC
No events:
eRTU does not reply
Time monitoring triggered

Scan the next eRTU
Case 2: An event has occurred in only one SICAM eRTU

Event occurs
Global scan QC
Response with scan request

for spontaneous events
Explicit call of the eRTU with a scan

of the spontaneous events QS
Transmission of the
spontaneous events
Further processing
Case 3: Events have occurred in several SICAM eRTUs

Event in 1st eRTU
Event in 2nd eRTU
Event in nth eRTU
Global scan QC
Several eRTUsreply at the same time
and make scan requests
occurs for spontaneous events
A collision
(pulse error)
Scan cycle with explicit call

of the individual eRTU QS
Further processing same as case 2
suc220.wmf
Fig. 11-13 Quick check procedure for asymmetric transmission

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Each time a SICAM eRTU is specifically polled, the control center sends
a "global scan to all SICAM eRTUs". Three reactions to this scan are
possible:
None of the SICAM eRTUs has had an event since the last
transmission. In this case, there is no response, and the procedure is
concluded after a time monitor expires.
An event has occurred in one of the addressed SICAM eRTUs.
The SICAM eRTU with spontaneous information reports this in its
response to the scan of the control center. The control center then
triggers the transmission of the data via a specific scan of this
SICAM eRTU.
Events have occurred in several addressed SICAM eRTUs.
In this case, all SICAM eRTUs send scan requests simultaneously to
the control center. A collision occurs and the control center
recognizes the destroyed telegrams. The control center starts a Quick
Scan cycle and calls the data selectively from the SICAM eRTUs.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.5 Control Center Link with the DNP V3.00 Telegram
The DNP V3.00 (Distributed Network Protocol) communications protocol

is based on an earlier version of the IEC 870-5 specification. Just like the
IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, DNP V3.00 uses a serial physical interface as
defined in the OSI layer model, see Chapter 11.2.1.
The main differences between the protocols are found in the data link
layer.
The DNP V3.00 protocol has the following features:
Format class FT3 (for asynchronous transmission!)
Variable telegram length
Address of control center and station contained in the telegram
Balanced Mode

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
DNP V3.00 is a protocol that uses telegrams with variable length.

The telegram fragment is equivalent to the application protocol data unit
(APDU).
Link Layer In the link layer, up to 255 bytes of application data are packed into one
frame. To this frame the transport protocol control information (TPCI) is
added.
If more than one frame needs to be transmitted, the FIR bit is set in the
control information of the first frame, and the FIN bit is deleted. The
number of the telegram (Sequence No.) is incremented by each further
frame to be sent. The FIN bit is set in the transport header TCPI of the
last frame.
The link header LPCI contains:
Start character
Telegram length
Control information
Receiver and sender address
CRC check character
Physical Layer The physical layer generates from the telegram frames variable FT3
telegram formats adds 2 check bytes every 16 bytes and sends these
telegrams via a serial interface to the communication partner.
A FT3 telegram can be up to 292 bytes long.
In the SICAM eRTU, the number of FT3 telegrams can be set to between
0 and 63 in monitoring direction; in control direction only one FT3
telegram is permissible, i.e. both the FIR and the FIN bit are set.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Link Layer Physical Layer

Telegram with transport layer function
FIR = 1
fragment
TPCI FIN = 0
Sequence = x
Start
LPCI
Frame 1
TPDU 1..16
data
bytes
FIR = 0
FIN = 0
TPCI Sequence = x+1 CRC
1..16
data
APDU bytes
Frame 2
TPDU
CRC
FIR = 0
FIN = 1
1..16
TPCI Sequence = x+2 data
bytes
CRC
Frame 3
TPDU
End
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit

TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit
TPCI Transport Protocol Control Information CRC
LPDU Link Protocol Data Unit
LPCI Link Protocol Control Information
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
suc230n.wmf
Fig. 11-14 Example of a telegram layout in DNP V3.00 with 3 frames
The above figure shows the generation of the individual frames from one
great telegram fragment in the application layer. This functions is taken
over by the transport layer of the link layer. The frames that are
generated in this way are provided with the transport layer control
information TPCI (see Transport Header,Page 280) and passed on to
the Physical layer.
Each frame (TPDU incl. TPCI) is provided with a link header (LPCI) and
transmitted in accordance with the FT3 specifications of the IEC 60870-
5-1 standard.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Link Header The link header LPCI ensures correct addressing and provides the
communication partner with the necessary control information.
Link Header LPCI

1. Byte startbyte = 05hex
2. Byte startbyte = 64hex
3. Byte Length Length
4. Byte Control Control field
5. Byte
Destination Target address
6. Byte
7. Byte
Source Source address
8. Byte
9. Byte
CRC Check byte
10. Byte
11. Byte Transport Header

12. Byte Start APDU
suc232.wmf
Fig. 11-15 Link Header in DNP V3.0
Each frame (see Figure11-14) is preceded by a link header (LPCI).

After the two start bytes, there is a statement of the length in which the
control field, the target and source address of the header and the number
of the subsequent data bytes are considered.
In the control field, the control information for the link layer of the
communication partner is entered.
The target address contains the address of the communication partner,
the source address the sender's own address.
Corruption of the link header data, beginning with the first start byte and
ending with the last byte of the source address, is prevented by the two
CRC check bytes.
Immediately after the link header follows the transport header TPCI and
up to 249 bytes of application data.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Control Field
MSB LSB
1 23 22 21 20 Primary to
FCB FCV secondary
DIR PRM station
Secondary to
0 0 DFC Function primary station
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Function Type of telegram (e.g. message with/without response,
acknowledgment). The code may have different meanings
for the two transmission directions.
FCV Frame count bit valid
FCB Frame count bit
DFC Data flow control
DIR "1" for messages from the control center to the
SICAM eRTU
"0" for messages from the SICAM eRTU to the control
center
A detailed explanation of the codes can be found in the document
DNP V3.0 Intelligent Electronic Device (IED), Certification Procedure,
Subset Level 2.
Transport Header The transport header TPCI coordinates the transmission of the individual
frames. It identifies all frames by ascending numbers, and additionally
the first frame (fragment start) and the last frame (fragment end).
MSB LSB
FIN FIR Sequence
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

FIR 1 in first frame, otherwise 0
FIN 1 in last frame, otherwise 0
Sequence Number of frame, first frame starts with 0

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.5.2 Application Area
The application data (APDU) consist of

Application header
Object header
Data (information object)
Request Header
Applic. Function
APDU Control code
APCI
DUI Response Header

Applic. Function Internal
Control code Indication
IO
Object Header
DUI
Object Variation Qualifier Range

IO
DUI
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit
APCI Application Protocol Control Information
DUI Data Unit Identifier
IO
IO Information Object
suc231.wmf
Fig. 11-16 Example of the application data (APDU) in the DNP V3.00 protocol
Application Header The application header APCI (Application Protocol Control Information)
describes the data portion of fragment level; it consists of:
Application Control AC
Function Code FC
Internal Indication IIN
(only in monitoring direction, response header)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Application Control The FIR and FIN bits are set according to the transmission mode (single
fragment or multiple fragment processing).
MSB LSB
0
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Confirm
FIR
FIN
Unsolicited
Sequence
FIR First fragment
FIN Last fragment
Confirm Is set when the application expects an
acknowledgment FC 0 from the partner station.
Unsolicited Is always 0 in the SICAM eRTU
Sequence 0 .. 31

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Function Code The function codes that are possible in the SICAM eRTU are listed in the
table below.
Table 11-20 Function code of the SICAM eRTU
Code Function Description

(dec)
0 Confirm Confirms a telegram fragment.
1 Read Requests specific data from the SICAM eRTU. SICAM

eRTU responds with the corresponding available data.
2 Write Stores specific data in the partner station. SICAM

eRTU responds with operational status.
Is currently used to delete the Device Restart Bit in IIN
(Internal Indication) and to synchronize the substation
clock.
3 Select Selects a specific command

SICAM eRTU responds with operational status.
4 Execute Activates/deactivates the previously selected

command.
5 Direct execute Activates/deactivates the specific command.

7 Immediate Copies the specific data into a restore buffer. SICAM

restore eRTU responds with operational status.
8 Immediate Copies the specific data into a restore buffer.

restore without No response from SICAM eRTU.
acknowledg-
ment
21 Deactivates Inhibits the operating mode "Unsolicited Report by

the Exception"
"Unsolicited SICAM eRTU responds with operational status.
Report by The response is currently always OK because no
Exception" spontaneous responses are supported.
mode
23 Runtime Enables the control center to calculate the signal

measurement runtimes between the SICAM eRTU. SICAM eRTU
responds with operational status and the current signal
runtime. Is currently used in connection with the write
function.
129 Response Response to a requested message.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Internal Indication The internal indication is an information element that is used to transmit
internal states and diagnostic results to the control center.
The internal indication exists only in monitoring direction.
1. octet
MSB LSB
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
All Stations
Need Time
Restart
Class 3
Class 2
Class 1
Dev.Trouble
Local
2. octet
MSB LSB
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Already Exec
Object Unknown
Reserved
Reserved
Bad Config
Buffer Overflow
Out of Range
A detailed explanation of all internal indications can be found in the Bad Function
documentation DNP V3.0 Intelligent Electronic Device (IED),
Certification Procedure, Subset Level 2.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Object Header The object header DUI (Data Unit Information) consists of:
Object
Variation
Qualifier
Range
The requested or sent type of information is described by the object field,
which consists of object and variation.
The types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU are
listed in the table below.
Table 11-21 Types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU
Object Request Response

(substation must (control station must
evaluate) evaluate)
Obj. Var. Description Function Qualifier Function Qualifier

code code code code
01 00 Binary input - all variations 1 *
01 01 Binary input (single bit) 1 * 129 01
01 02 Binary input with status 1 * 129 28
02 00 Change of binary input - all variations 1 *

(change due to class 1 request)
02 01 Change of binary input without time stamp 1 * 129 28
02 02 Change of binary input with time stamp 1 * 129 28
02 03 Change of binary input with relative time 1 * 129, -

IIN=2/1
10 00 Binary output - all variations 1 *
10 02 Binary output with status 1 * 129 28
12 01 Switching command 3, 4, 5 * 129 mirrored
20 00 Binary metered value - all variations 1, 7, 8 *
20 01 Change of 32-bit binary metered value with flags 1, 7, 8 * 129 28
20 05 Change of 32-bit binary metered value without 1, 7, 8 * 129 28

flags
21 00 Metered value freeze - all variations 1 *
21 01 Freeze of 32-bit metered value with flags 1 * 129 28
21 05 Freeze of 32-bit metered value without flags 1 * 129 28
22 00 Change of metered value 1 *

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-21 Types of information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU
Object Request Response

(substation must (control station must
evaluate) evaluate)
22 01 Change of 32-bit metered value without time 1 * 129 28

stamp
22 05 Change of 32-bit metered value with time stamp 1 * 129 28
30 00 Analog input - all variations 1 *
30 02 16-bit analog input (raw value) with flags 1 * 129 28
30 04 16-bit analog input (raw value) without flags 1 * 129 28
32 00 Change of analog event - all variations 1 *

(change due to class 2 request)
32 02 Change of 16-bit analog event without time stamp 1 * 129 28
32 04 Change of 16-bit analog event with time stamp 1 * 129 28
40 00 Analog output status - all variations 1 * 129

IIN=2/1
41 02 16-bit analog output 3, 4, 5 * 129 mirrored
50 01 Clock synchronization 2 * 129 -
52 02 Runtime measurement 23 - 129 07,

quantity
=1
60 01 Class 0 data 1 *
80 01 Internal Indications 1 * 129 -
2 00 129 -
IIN=1/7
IIN = 1/7: Internal Indication 1st octet, 7th bit, Device Restart
IIN = 2/1: Internal Indication 2nd octet, 1st bit, Requested Object
Unknown

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Qualifier The qualifier describes the meaning of the range field.

It consists of:
Index Size
Qualifier Code
MSB LSB
- Index Size Qualifier Code
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Qualifier code
0 8-bit start/stop address in the range field
1 16-bit start/stop address in the range field
3 8-bit absolute address statement in the range field
4 16-bit absolute address statement in the range field
6 no range field
7 8-bit number of objects
8 16-bit number of objects
Index Size
0 no index
1 1 byte of index
2 2 bytes of index
Range The range field specifies the number of objects or the first/last object
address. The size and structure of the range field is defined by the
qualifier. If the qualifier code is 6, the range field is omitted.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Error indications If the SICAM eRTU detects an error in the request from the control
center, it responds by internal indications, 2nd octet, according to the
following table:
Table 11-22 Error indications
IIN Indication Description

Bit
0 Function This function is not supported by the degree of

unknown implementation, see Table 11-20, “Function code of
the SICAM eRTU,” on page 283
1 Object This object is not supported by the degree of

unknown implementation, see Table 11-21, “Types of
information that are implemented in the SICAM eRTU,”
on page 285
2 Parameter The qualifier code information received does not

error correspond to the parameterized data objects. No data
are transmitted.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.6 Control Center Link with the TELEGYR 800 Telegram
SICAM eRTU supports the protocol TELEGYR 800 in the request

mode.
The TELEGYR 800-request mode operation is closely related to the
IEC 60870-5-101 unbalanced mode.
The TELEGYR 800 protocol is pulse code modulated and consists of the
following layers:
Physical bit transmission layer (physical layer)
Link layer
Application layer
Physical layer The physical (bit transmission) layer fulfils the following tasks:
Galvanic isolation (2.5 kV)
Bit and telegram synchronization
Protection against the evaluation of corrupted telegrams and
protection of telegrams against loss by creating and checking
checkcodes and by acknowledgment.
Format class FT1.2 is fulfilled (equivalent to a Hamming distance d =
4); it is thus compliant with integrity class I2.
Interfaces Connect the lines to the control centers at the two 25-pole ports X1/X2
X1 and X2 are parameterizable as V.24/V.28 interface - asynchronous.
The possible transmission speed is between 50 bits/s and 115.200 bits/
s and depends on the external conditions.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Link layer The link layer controls the transmission procedure. Its main tasks are:
Performing the basic services (e. g. Request / Respond, Send /
Confirm).
Adding the control fields in telegrams with mode-specific information.
Application layer The application layer identifies and handles the telegram information. Its
main tasks are:
Command management
The Protocol TELEGYR 800 knows software and hardware addresses
for the addressing of the single information objects.
Representation In a TELEGYR 800 telegram each data byte is complemented with a

start, a parity and a stop character. The parity is even. The following
figure shows those characters that are transmitted and those that are
shown in telegram images.
Bit sequence on the line

11. 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Bit
Stop Parity 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Start

bit bit 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 bit
Start character (=68hex) 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Byte 1

Byte 2
User
information Byte n-2
Check sum character Byte n-1
1 x Check sum 0
for entire telegram
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 Byte n
End character (= 16hex)
Characters represented
in telegram screens
Transmitted characters
suc215.wmf
Fig. 11-1 Representation of TELEGYR 800 telegrams

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Rules of Transmission is subject to 6 rules:

transmission
Rule 1 In quiescent state 1 signal is present on the line.
Rule 2 A character consists of a start bit, 8 information bits, an even
parity bit and a stop bit.
Rule 3 Quiescent states between the characters of a telegram are
permitted or not permitted depending on the
parameterization.
Rule 4 The user data are finished by an 8-bit checksum (CS). The
checksum is the sum of all user data without carry.
Rule 5 The receiver checks the characters for start bit, stop bit and
an even parity bit. The telegram is checked for the start
character, the telegram checksum and the end character. If
an error is found during one of the checks, the telegram is
rejected, otherwise it must be released for further processing.
Rule 6 Between the telegrams a minimum interval of 33 bits
quiescent state is necessary, so that in case of an error as per
Rule 5 the receiver can be synchronized.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Three telegram variants are used in the TELEGYR 800 telegram:

Telegrams with variable length
Telegrams with fixed length
Single characters
The following figure shows the different telegram structures.
Telegram with Telegram with Single character

variable length *) fixed length
Start char. = 68hex Start char. = 10hex Header Single char. = E5hex
Block length Address field User
Header
area
Block length Function field
Start char. = 68hex Check sum
Address field End char. = 16hex
Function field
Information
address
User area
Information
object
Check sum
long block
End char. = 16hex 1) also called
Picture_7_2.wmf
Fig. 11-2 Layout of TELEGYR 800 telegrams in the SICAM eRTU system
Start / end The start and end characters delimit the telegram and are part of the
character telegram protection.
In addition, the start character identifies the telegram:
Start character = 68 hex:Telegram with variable length (long block)
Start character = 10 hex:Telegram with fixed length (short block)
Start character = E5 hex: Single character

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Block length The block length field in the header of telegrams with variable length
contains the number of bytes of the user data area. The value can be up
to 255.
The telegram length is obtained by adding 6 bytes to the content of the
block length field (4 bytes header, 1 byte each for checksum and end
character).
The second block length field repeats the value of the first and is used by
the link layer for checking the telegram.
Application area The user data area in the telegram consists of:
Address field
Function field
Information address
Information object
Address field The address field contains the station address (COM No.) and serves for
the recognition of the SICAM eRTU, both in control and in monitoring
direction. Its length is one byte.
The content of the address field can be parameterized:
0 ... 254 for any SICAM eRTU
255 for telegrams to all SICAM eRTUs of one line
Function field The function field contains information about the direction of the
telegrams and control information and an adddress field expansion.
MSB LSB
Control
AKC (incl. SFB) FA
direction
Function field AEH AEL RB
Monitoring
BA - OF AQ AS
direction
Bit 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

AKC Call-Control-Code with fixed sequential bit (Bit 24 = SFB).
The fixed sequential bit makes it possible to recognize
information loss and information multiplication.
Bit Meaning
at link layer at application layer
27 26 25 24 (FA = 0) (FA = 1)
0 0 0 0 Reset SFB
0 0 0 1 Status scan
0 1 1 0 send with SFB = 0
FA The function selection states the layer for which the

Call-Control-Code is valid.
0 Call-Controll-Code is valid for the link layer
1 Call-Controll-Code is valid for the link layer
AE The Address field expansion AEh and AEl is not used in
the SICAM eRTU and has always got the
value 0.
RB Direction bit of the information:
0 at transmission in monitoring direction (to the
control center)
1 at transmission in control direction (to the control
center)
BA Operating demand of the substation to the control
station:
0 no additional data available
1 no additional data available for transmission
OF 0ffline / Online
0 Online
1 Offline
AQ Order acknowledgement: This bit is not used and has
got the value 0.
AS Request blocking: This bit is not used and has got the
value 0.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.6.3 User Area in the TELEGYR 800 Telegram
Information In the SICAM eRTU the information address of TELEGYR 800 contains
address the following criteria:
Station number (optional, depending on addressing variant)
Information type
Information address
Addressing variants:
Identification via hardware address
Identification via software address
Hardware address Addressing criteria:
Flags Expanded description of address layout
Station number 0 to 1 020
Software bit (SW- 0 = the previous address is a hardware address

Bit) (1 = the previous address is a software address)
Cabinet No. 0 to 7
Chassis No. 0 to 4
Slot No. 0 to 15 in chassis
Point No. 0 to 255
All address elements (except flags) must be parameterized explicitly for

each information point.
Table 11-23 Addressing variants
Hardware addressing variant Parameterized station No. Cabinet No. Point No.
Short hardware address without station No. complies with own station No. 0 <32
Short hardware address with station No. different from own station No. 0 <32
Long hardware address without station No. complies with own station No. >0 Irrelevant
Long hardware address with station No. different from own station No. >0 Irrelevant

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Software address Addressing criteria:
Flags Expanded description of address layout
Station number 0 to 1 020
Software bit (SW- 1 = the previous address is a software address

Bit) (0 = the previous address is a hardware address)
Point No. 0 to 32 767 (clearly within a station number)
Table 11-24 Addressing variants
Software addressing variant Parameterized station No.

Software address without station No. complies with own station No.
Software address with station No. different from own station No.
Analysis of address The content of the field Flags specifies the further processing of the
layout information and controls its forwarding to the user program.
Flags
Address IAC E S
IAC 0 Expansion IAC in next byte

1 Indication without time, no IAC expansion
2 Indication with time, no IAC expansion
3 Spontaneous measured value, no IAC expansion
E Address expansion bit

0 Short address (only for hardware addresses)
1 Long address, software bit available
S Station number bit

0 Address without station No.
1 Address with station No.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Hardware address Explanation of the field contents:

layouts
E 1 Address expansion bit (1 = long address)
S 1 Station number bit (1 = with station number)
SW 1 SW-Bit (1 = an SW-point number follows)
IAC Information-Type-Character (Information type)
Long hardware address without station number
Address IAC>0 E=1 S=0 0 SW=0 Cab.h
Cab.I Chassis Slot
Point
Information
Long hardware address without station number
Address IAC>0 E=1 S=1 Station number high
Station number low SW=0 Cab.h
Cab.I Chassis Slot
Point
Information
Long hardware address without station number, with IAC expansion
Address IAC=0 E=1 S=0 0 SW=0 Cab.h
IAC expansion
Cab.I Chassis Slot
Point
Information

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Long hardware address with station number, with IAC expansion
Address IAC=0 E=1 S=1 Station number high
IAC expansion
Station number low SW=0 Cab.h
Cab.I Chassis Slot
Point
Information
Short hardware address without station number
Address IAC>0 E=0 S=0 Chassis Slot
Slot low Point
information
Short hardware address with station number
Station number low Chassis Slot
Slot low Point
Information
Short hardware address without station number, with IAC expansion
Address IAC=0 E=0 S=0 Chassis Slot
IAC expansion
Slot low Point
Information

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Short hardware address with station number, with IAC expansion
IAC expansion
Station number low Chassis Slot
Slot low Point
Information
Software address Software address without station number

layouts
Address IAC>0 E=1 S=0 0 SW=1 0
0 Point high
Point low
Information
Software address with station number
Station number low SW=1 0
0 Point high
Point low
Information
Software address without station number, with IAC expansion
Address IAC=0 E=1 S=0 0 SW=1 0
IAC expansion
0 Point high
Point low
Information

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Software address with station number, with IAC expansion
IAC expansion
Station number low SW=1 0
0 Point high
Point low
Information
Information objects When IAC has the value zero, there is an IAC expansion with values of
>3.
Table 11-25 Information in monitoring direction
IAC Meaning
0 Telegram contains IAC expansion
1 Indication without time *)
2 Indication with time stamp *)
3 Measured-values *)
IACex Meaning
10 Metered values, requested *)
15 GI: Blocks of indications *)
16 GI: Blocks of analog measured values *)
17 GI: Blocks of digital measured values *)
18 GI: Blocks of system messages *)
25 Own station number
*) With SW /HW point number

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
IAC Meaning
128 Impulse command (single command and double command) *)
131 Setpoint command (default value) *)
134 PBN command
135 Time synchronizing command
144 Metered-value request
145 Metered-value request
160 General interrogation command for all indications
161 General interrogation command for all measured values
162 General interrogation command for all system messages
163 Acknowledge command for system messages
165 Scanning own station number
*) With SW /HW point number
The content of the information object depends on the information type

(IAC) (see tables above).
The information object consists of:
Information
Status of the information and

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.6.4 Information in Monitoring Direction

IAC1: Addressing type All HW and SW address variants
Single and Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
double-point 1020
indication Address of the information object SW number 0 ... 32767
without time
Information in the information object Status of the indication
stamp
Single-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 =
or
On
system message
Double-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 =
On
00 or 11 = Failure
Descriptors:
I = Invalid bit
V = Double-point indication
(= 1 at double-point indication)
R = Feedback bit
(= 1 when in time after command)
Single and Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
double-point 1020
indication with Address of the information object SW number 0 ... 32767
long time stamp
Information in the information object Status of the indication
Single-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 =
On
Double-point indication: 01 = Off, 10 =
On
00 or 11 = Failure
Descriptors:
G = Coarse time = 1
(i. e. Milli seconds up to hours)
G = Coarse time = 0
(i. e. Milli seconds up to seconds)
I = Invalid bit
V = Double-point indication
(= 1 at double-point indication)
R = Feedback bit
(= 1 when in time after command)
Time:
Hours: 0 ... 23
Minutes: 0 ... 59
Seconds: 0 ... 59
Milliseconds: 0 ... 999
Time error bits:
F = 1 = Time wrong
(e. g. time never set by
Master)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-27 Information in monitoring direction (Forts.)

Single measured Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
value without 1020
time stamp Address of the information object SW number 0 ... 32767
(for measured Address offset per data point
values, bit - for measured values analog: 1
patterns and - for bit pattern, transformer taps: 16
transformer
Information in the information object Status of the measured value:
taps)
-32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%)
(Two's complement, only even
values are valid)
Descriptors:
I = Invalid bit
(= 1, if invalid, not current,
Overflow or if step transformer in
intermediate position)
Single current Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
metered values 1020
after GI scan Address first information object SW number 0 ... 32767
Address offset per data point
- for measured values analog: 1
- for bit pattern, transformer taps: 16
Set of the metered values available The amount of the set V-bits shows the
(V-Set) number of the following metered values.
From V-bit to V-bit the address increases
by 1. Every gap has as result an additional
address point of 1.
Information in the information object Counter reading
0 ... 9.999.999
(i. e. overflow happens at)
9.999.999)
Polling time: 0
Descriptors:
FZI = Error on the meter pulse input
(e. g. closed-circuit current)
ZNG = Counter value never set
(always stays on 1)
SNI = Station initialized new (= 1)
ZUE = Counter value overflow
(over 9.999.999 restart at 0)
Single current Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
metered values 1020
spontaneous Address first information object SW number 0 ... 32767
Address offset per data point
- for measured values analog: 1
- for bit pattern, transformer taps: 16
Set of the metered values available Metered value 1 is transmitted. The lowest-
(V-Set) value V-bit is set.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

Information in the information object Counter reading
0 ... 9.999.999
(i. e. overflow happens at)
9.999.999)
Freezing time:
Day, hour, minute of local freezing
Descriptors:
FZI = Error on the meter pulse input
(e. g. closed-circuit current)
ZNG = Counter value never set
(always stays on 1)
SNI = Station initialized new (= 1)
ZUE = Metered value overflow
(over 9.999.999 restart at 0)
GI blocks of Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
indications 1020
Address first information object SW number 0 ... 32767
(0 or a multiple of 8)
Set to available indication bytes The amount of the set V-bits shows the
(V-Set) number of the following indication bytes.
address point of 8.
Information in the information object S = Status (0/1) of the 8 bit per indication
byte,
not depending on whether these are
Single-point or double-point indications.
I = Invalid bits to the status above (1 =
invalid)
The invalid bits are per status bit
available. The status is also invalid,
if it is set RTU-internally to not topical
set to
measured values 1020
analog Address first information object SW number 0 ... 32767
(for measured
Set of the measured values The amount of the set V-bits shows the
values)
available number of the following measured values.
(V-Set) From V-bit to V-bit the address increases
address point of 1.
Information in the information object Status of the measured values (maximally
8):
-32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%)
values are valid)
Descriptors:
I = Invalid bit
(= 1, if invalid, or not current)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2

measured values 1020
digital Address first information object SW number 0 ... 32767
(for bit patterns (multiple of 16)
and transformer
Set of the measured values The amount of the set V-bits shows the
taps)
available number of the following measured values.
(V-Set) From V-bit to V-bit the address increases
by 16. Every gap has as result an
additional address point of 16.
Information in the information object Status of the measured values (maximally
8):
-32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%)
values are valid)
Descriptors:
I = Invalid bit
(= 1, if invalid, or not current)
IAC18: Addressing type only SW address variants (SW=1)
scanned system Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
messages 1020
Address first information object SW number = 0
Set to available indication bytes The amount of the set V-bits shows the
(V-Set) number of the following indication bytes.
address point of 8.
Information in the information object S = status (0/1) current status of bit
(parameterize system messages as
single-point
messages with retention buffer and
reset type by command)
E = Event bit
indicates if the status since the last
acknowledgement (IAC163) has ever
changed to ON.
IAC25: Addressing type No hardware / software address
Own station Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
number 1020
SG-Bit = 0

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
11.6.5 Information in Control Direction
In control direction, pulse commands, set-point values and time

synchronization commands are transmitted separately. Similar
commands can be transmitted together for all other commands.
Table 11-28 Information in control direction

IAC128: Addressing type Software address with station number
Pulse command (E = 1, S = 1, SW = 1)
(for single-point or
and double-point hardware address (long) with station
commands) number
(E = 1, S = 1, SW = 0)
Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
1020
Address of the information object SW number
0 ... 32767(unique in RTU)
or
HW address with:
Point-No. 0 ... 255
(only even point numbers),
Slot No. 0 ... 15,
Chassis No. = 0 to 7,
Cabinet No. = 0 to 3,
Information Command direction:
0 = OFF
1 = ON
CRC-Code security via the 5 data with inverted 16-Bit-CRC according to
bytes of the command, including IEC TC57 for the format FT3
IAC (Version 1985):
216 + 214 + 212 + 211 + 29 + 28 + 27 + 24
+ 21 + 1
The MS-Bit of the first address byte is
processed first.
This Code security results in a Hamming
distance of 8.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-28 Information in control direction (Forts.)

IAC131: Addressing type Software address with station number
Set-point (E = 1, S = 1, SW = 1)
command hardware address (long) with station
number
(E = 1, S = 1, SW = 0)
Station number Can be parameterized in the range 0...
1020
Address of the information object SW number
0 ... 32767 (unique in RTU)
or
HW address with:
Point No. 0 ... 255
(only even point numbers),
Slot No. 0 ... 15,
Chassis No. = 0 to 7,
Cabinet No. = 0 to 3,
Transmitted setpoint value -32.000 (-100%) ... +32.000 (+100%)
(Two's complement)
CRC-Code security via the 5 with inverted 16-Bit-CRC according to
address bytes of the command, IEC TC57 for the format FT3
including IAC plus setpoint value (Version 1985):
216 + 214 + 212 + 211 + 29 + 28 + 27 + 24
+ 21 + 1
processed first.
distance of 8.
PBN command Information Station number 0 to 999
(double-point Command address 0 to 9999
command) Command direction: 1: OFF, 2: ON
CRC-Code security via the 18 data with inverted 16-Bit-CRC according to
bytes of the command, including IEC TC57 for the format FT3
IAC plus setpoint value (Version 1985):
216 + 214 + 212 + 211 + 29 + 28 + 27 + 24
+ 21 + 1
processed first.
distance of 8.
IAC135: Addressing type No software address
Time synchroni- Station number Missing
zation command
In the link address of the telegram is the
link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
255). With the link address 255 the
telegram always is directed to all stations.
Time for synchronizing Year 0 ... 99, month 1 ... 12, day 1 ...31,
Weekday 1 ... 7 (Monday = 1),
Hour 0 ... 23, minunte 0 ... 59,
Milliseconds 0 ... 999,
No summer time bit

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Table 11-28 Information in control direction (Forts.)

Order to transmit Station number Missing
the metered
values In the link address of the telegram is the
link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
Polling group set Metered values which are assigned to the
same groups in the RTU, are transmitted.
Order for the Station number Missing
transmission of
the locally frozen In the link address of the telegram is the
metered values link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
Polling group set Metered values which are assigned to the
same groups in the RTU, are transmitted.
General Station number Missing
interrogation
command for all In the link address of the telegram is the
indications link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
interrogation
measured values link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
interrogation
system link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
indications 255). With the link address 255 the
Station number of original station Irrelevant

Acknowledgeme Station number Missing
nt system In the link address of the telegram is the
messages link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254,
Send own Station number Missing
station number In the link address of the telegram is the
link address of the SICAM eRTU (0 - 254).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Appendix A
Contents A.1 Indications of the Transmission Protocols 310
A.2 Indications of the Substation Interface 313
A.3 Indications of the Bay Device Protocols 315

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A Appendix
A.1 Indications of the Transmission Protocols
Indications of the Transmission Protocols

IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-104
SINAUT 8-FW
DNP V3.00
TELEGYR 800
Table A-1 Indications of the Transmission Protokols
Alarm no. Protocol Error text short/long
61446 IEC 101 Pulse error

SINAUT
DNP
F006hex TG 800
61447 IEC 101 Channel error (receive)

SINAUT
DNP
F007hex TG 800
61448 Overwrite receive buffer

SINAUT
F008hex TG 800
61449 Full cycle running

SINAUT
F009hex
61451 IEC 101/104 Command output error

SINAUT
DNP
F00Bhex TG 800
61452 IEC 101/104 Command not executed

SINAUT
DNP
F00Chex TG 800
61456 IEC 101/104 Substation disrupted

SINAUT
DNP
F010hex TG 800

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A.1 Indications of the Transmission Protocols
61458 IEC 101/104 Telegram buffer overflow

SINAUT
DNP
F012hex TG 800
61467 IEC 101/104 Check set error
F01Bhex
61469 IEC 101/104 Information loss
DNP
F01Dhex TG 800
61482 IEC 101/104 Configuration error

SINAUT
DNP
F02Ahex TG 800
61483 IEC Cycle error

SINAUT
F02Bhex
61484 IEC 101/104 Message mem. warn. limit

SINAUT
DNP
F02Chex TG 800
61485 IEC 101/104 Command not parameterized

SINAUT
DNP
F02Dhex TG 800
61486 IEC 101/104 Function not available

SINAUT
DNP
F02Ehex TG 800
61487 IEC 101/104 Command buffer overflow

SINAUT
DNP
F02Fhex TG 800

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A Appendix
61488 IEC 101/104 Telegram error

SINAUT
DNP
F030hex TG 800
61493 IEC 101/104 Fault in switchyard
F035hex
61499 IEC 101 X21 indication error
F03Bhex
61696 IEC 101/104 GI

SINAUT
F100hex TG 800
61699 IEC 101/104 Remote reset

SINAUT
F103hex
61700 Retention circuit resolution

SINAUT
F104hex

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A.2 Indications of the Substation Interface
A.2 Indications of the Substation Interface
Indications of the substation interface with the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol
Table A-2 Indications of the substation interface
alarm-no. Error text short/long
61446 Pulse error
F006hex
61447 Channel error (receive)
F007hex
61451 Command output error
F00Bhex
61469 Information loss
F01Dhex
61482 Configuration error
F02Ahex
61485 Command not parameterized
F02Dhex
61486 Function not available
F02Ehex
61487 Command buffer overflow
F02Fhex
61488 Telegram error
F030hex
61493 Fault in switchyard
F035hex

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A Appendix
Table A-2 Indications of the substation interface
61500 Substation started
F03Chex
64001 Disable telecontrol
FA01hex
64002 Disable bay
FA02hex
65025 Telecontrol disabled
FE01hex
65026 Bay disabled
FE02hex
65027 Bay disabled (IED)
FE03hex

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A.3 Indications of the Bay Device Protocols
A.3 Indications of the Bay Device Protocols
Indications of the Bay Device Protocols

IEC 60870-5-103
DNP V3.00
Table A-3 Indications of the Bay Device Protocols
Alarm no. Error text short/long
61469 Information loss
F01Dhex
61482 Configuration error
F02Ahex
61485 Command not parameterized
F02Dhex
61486 Function not available
F02Ehex
61487 Command buffer overflow
F02Fhex
61488 Telegram error
F030hex
61493 Fault in switchyard
F035hex

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
A Appendix

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
References
/1/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Basic Information for V5.2

includes: Getting Started, manuals for hardware configuration,
programming and changing from S5
6ES7810-4CA06-8BA0
/2/ SIMATIC S7, STEP 7 Reference Manual for V5.2
includes: Manual for LAD/STL/FDB and the Reference Manual for
S7-300/400
6ES7810-4CA06-8BR0
/3/ SIMATIC S7/M7, Programmable Controllers Module Specifica-
tions S7-400, M7-400
includes: Reference manual (module data), installation manual
(assembly), operation list S7-400 (reference guide)
6ES7498-8AA03-8BA0
/4/ SIMATIC S7, CFC for S7, Manual
The documentation for CFC is is supplied as PDF on the product
CD ROM. It is not available in printed form.
/5/ SICAM RTU, Technical Description
E50417-S8976-C002-A4
/6/ SICAM, Manual Analog Input Function Module AI32/16
E50417-G8976-C004-A2
/7/ SICAM, Manual Digital Input Function Module DI32
E50417-G8976-C005-A2
/8/ SICAM, Manual Command Output Function Module CO32
E50417-G8976-C006-A2
/9/ SICAM, Manual Command Release Function Module CR
E50417-G8976-C007-A2
/10/ SICAM RTU, Manual Configuration System
SICAM plusTOOLS for RTU
E50417-H8976-C008-A4
/11/ SICAM RTU, Function Description Advanced Functionality with
RTU API
E50417-H8976-C051-A4
/12/ SICAM RTU, Maintenance and Diagnostics
E50417-W8976-C054-A2
/13/ SICAM RTU, Mounting Instructions
E50417-B8976-C136-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
References
E50417-H8976-C162-A2
/15/ SICAM eRTU, Manual SICAM plusTOOLS, CFC-Blocks
E50417-H8976-C163-A3
E50417-P8976-C164-A2
E50417-B8976-C178-A2
E50417-S8976-C179-A2
/19/ SICAM Diamond
E50417-H8976-C183-A1
E50417-F8976-C184-A2

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Ab Interrogation list, telecontrol list that processes the information necessary

for the communication with higher-level control centers in the monitoring
direction (→ COM TC).
Address We distinguish between two different types of addresses:

For identifying a certain module (slot, rack)
For identifying a certain operand or operand area (e.g. input I12.1).
Adjusting com- Adjusting command is a function of the output time of the → command
mand depending on the duration of the command output in the operating con-
trol center. They are apt for manual setpoint settings in slow control cir-
cuits.
AI The Analog Input module is available with 16 relay inputs or with 32 solid-
state inputs.
ASP → Trigger storage list
Application The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration system is divided into the following
function-specific applications: SIM, COM IED, COM TC and Hardware
Configuration.
Application The SICAM eRTU/RTU differentiates between the operating system of

program the CPU and the application system. The latter is connected with the pro-
gramming software STEP 7 e.g. with → CFC from blocks and is stored in
the code blocks. Data are stored in the data blocks.
APA → Job buffer
Automatic Automatic reclosing is a function which is frequently used in power distri-

reclosing bution for extinguishing electric arcs on overhead lines. Automatic reclos-
ing means that a closed circuit-breaker is opened and reclosed after a
short delay.
Automation com- The control functions are performed by a computer program and are not
puter permanently stored in a retentive memory → programmable logic control-
ler.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Automation system An automation system is a → programmable logic controller or an →

automation computer from the SIMATIC S7 family.
Back-up battery The back-up battery ensures that pre-defined data areas, flags, timers
and counters are held as retentive. SICAM RTU/eRTU works without a
back-up battery.
Bay device Bay devices include:

Bay controllers
Mini bay units
Protection devices
Measuring instruments
→ IED
Bay device proto- Protocol which is used for communication between the substation con-
col troller and bay devices, e.g. IEC 60870-5-103.
Bit pattern indica- A bit pattern indication is a processing function on the digital input module
tion which makes it possible to jointly acquire and process digital process-
related information which is present at several inputs in parallel. As bit
pattern size, you can choose between 1, 2, 3 and 4 bytes.
BO_x → Bit pattern indication (bitstring of x bits);

x designates the size in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits).
Bus A bus is a transmission medium which interconnects several stations.

Data transmission can be serial or parallel, via electric cables or via fiber
optic cables.
Central controller The central controller is the equipped rack which contains the
SIMATIC M7 CPU of the SICAM SC or the SIMATIC S7 CPU of the
SICAM RTU respectively.
Central rack → Rack
CFC Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphic editor which allows you to
configure a program using prefabricated blocks.
CFC blocks Blocks are parts of the user program. They are determined by their func-
tion, structure and intended purpose. SICAM plusTOOLS is delivered
together with a library of blocks developed especially for substation con-
trol and protection systems.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Chatter blocking A fast intermittent input (e.g. as a result of a relay contact fault) is discon-
nected after a parameterizable monitoring time and cannot produce any
further signal changes. This function prevents the system from being
overloaded in case of a fault.
CI → Restore command (counter interrogation command)
CO Command output module
Code block In a SIMATIC S7 a code block is a block which contains part of the appli-
cation program (as opposed to a → data block, which contains only data).
COM IED Communication to Intelligent Electronic Device. This application is used

for configuring the communication to bay devices.
COM TC Communication to Telecontrol Center. This application is used for config-

uring to higher-level control centers.
Command Commands are safe process outputs with a defined output time. Before
the output voltage is switched through, a number of checks is performed
(e.g. one-out-of-n monitoring, readback of the relay drivers, impedance
and electrical isolation of the load, etc.).
Command ending With the command ending function, a running command output is termi-
nated upon expiration of the parameterized output time or upon arrival of
the process feedback assigned to it.
Communications The MCP communications processor manages the communication of a

processor SICAM RTU/eRTU with higher-level telecontrol centers and/or bay
devices. The number of interfaces which are available can be increased
by using the XC2 and XF6 expansion modules.
COMTRADE Format for fault records in protection devices.
Configuration Configuration means arranging, addressing and parameterizing the mod-

ules of the SICAM Substation Controller and the SICAM RTU in a → rack
with the help of the Hardware Configuration application.
Container The SICAM plusTOOLS data are stored in function-specific containers.

Some examples are the SIM Table, the MIM Table, COM IED and COM
TC. IED and COM TC.
CPU Central processing unit of the the SICAM RTU/eRTU with control and
arithmetic unit, memory, operating system and interface for programming
devices.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
CR Command release module
Cycle time The cycle time is the time needed by the CPU to execute the application
program once.
Cyclic interrupt Cyclic interrupts are tasks which are started at regular intervals, i.e. cycli-
cally.
Data block Data blocks are data areas within the application program which contain
user data. There are global data blocks which can be accessed by all
code blocks.
DB → Data block
DCF77 In the Federal Republic of Germany, the high-precision official time is

managed by the Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt PTB (German
Federal Testing Laboratories) in Brunswick. The atomic clock station of
the PTB broadcasts this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter at
Mainflingen near Frankfurt on the Main. The transmitted time signal can
be received within a radius of approx. 2000 km around Frankfurt on the
Main.
DC_PER → Double command, persistent command
DC_PUL → Double command, pulse command
DI Digital input module
Diagnosis alarm Modules with diagnostic capability report system faults which they have
recognized by means of diagnosis alarms to the → CPU.
Diagnostic buffer The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU into which
the diagnosis events are written in chronological order.
Double command Double commands are process outputs which represent 4 process states
at 2 outputs: 2 determined states (e.g. ON/OFF) and 2 undetermined
states (e.g. fault positions).
Double-point indi- Double-point indications are items of process information which repre-
cation sent 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2 determined states (e.g. ON/OFF) and
2 undetermined states (e.g. fault positions).
DP → Double-point indication

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
DPDM Digital pulse duration modulation
Drag & Drop Copy, move and shortcut function which is commonly used in graphical
user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse, seized and moved
from one data area to another.
Electrical Fast Procedure for testing the interference immunity (e.g. of the process
Transient (Burst) inputs/outputs). The type of coupling and the physical magnitudes are
defined in the IEC 60801–4 standard.
Electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) designates the ability of electrical

compatibility equipment to function properly in a defined environment without affecting
this environment in an unacceptable way.
EMC → Electromagnetic compatibility
Environmental con- Environmental conditions comprise all external disturbing influences to

ditions which electrical equipment may be exposed:
Temperature, humidity, electrostatic and electromagnetic fields,
mechanical impacts, etc.
EP Protection device information, register in → COM TC
EPE → Event buffer
EPROM An EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) is a voltage-

independent, permanently-programmed memory for programs and data.
Equipotential Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) which brings the

bonding housings of electrical equipment and other conductive station compo-
nents to equal or nearly equal potential in order to prevent interference
or hazardous voltages between those components.
Error response Response to a → runtime error. Possible responses of the operating sys-
tem are:
Transition of the automation system to the STOP status
Invocation of an organizational block/ an error task which contains a
programmed reaction
Error message.
Error task Error tasks make it possible to react to certain errors which are recog-
nized by the runtime system during runtime. There are three error
classes: I/O access errors, processor errors and time-out errors.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
ESD protection ESD protection encompasses all means and measures used for protect-
ing electrostatically sensitive devices.
Event buffer The event buffer of the inputs (German abbreviation: EPE) is used to
buffer preprocessed process events. Each event is made available in a
data block. The event buffer is organized according to the “first-in-first-
out” principle. If there is at least one data block in the EPE, a → hardware
interrupt is issued to indicate that it is ready for collection.
Expansion The XC2 and XF6 modules are designed as expansion modules of the
module → MCP communications processor. They can only be used in combina-
tion with the MCP module → MCP assembly), in order to increase the
total number of → process-end interfaces. XC2 offers two serial inter-
faces RS232 or RS485. XF6 provides six interfaces for connecting fiber
optic cables.
Expansion rack → Rack
Expansion unit An expansion unit is an → expansion rack connected to the central con-
troller and equipped with a power supply module, an interface module
and further modules.
FLASH-EPROM (FLASH-EPROM = Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory)

FLASH-EPROMs are like the electrically erasable EEPROMs in that they
are able to retain data in case of a power failure, but can be erased far
more quickly. They are used on → memory cards.
Fleeting indication Fleeting indications are → single-point indications which are present only
for a very short time, where only the rising edge of the process signal is
acquired and processed in real time.
Floating → Isolated
FM → Function module
Frame Frame designates all interconnected inactive parts of electrical equip-

ment which must not carry any hazardous touch voltage, not even in case
of a fault.
Front connector Process-end 48-pin module connector. Available with screw-type con-
tacts, crimp contacts and spring-loaded terminals, with conductor cross-
sections of up to 1.5 mm 2. The available cable space has to be
observed.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Function According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a → code block without any
static data. A function offers the possibility of handing over parameters in
the application program. Therefore functions are suitable for program-
ming frequently recurring complex functions (e.g. calculations).
Function module Function modules are intelligent signal converters which preprocess pro-
cess information, thus relieving the → CPU → Configuration of the FMs
is done using → parameters.
Functional ground- Grounding whose sole purpose is to guarantee that the electrical equip-
ing ment functions as intended. Functional grounding short-circuits interfer-
ence voltages which would otherwise lead to inadmissible interferences
in the electrical equipment.
General interroga- For the system startup, the state of all process inputs, of the status and
tion (GI) the fault image is checked. This information is used for updating the sys-
tem-end process image. It is equally possible to check the current pro-
cess state after a data loss with the help of a GI.
Global data Global data are data which can be addressed from each → code block.
This includes e.g. inputs I, outputs O and data blocks DB. Global data
can be accessed either absolutely or symbolically.
GPS Satellites with atomic clocks on board revolve around the earth on differ-
ent orbits at an altitude of approx. 20,000 km twice a day. They broadcast
signals which include the GPS universal time.
The GPS receiver determines its own position on the basis of the signals
received. From the position, it can derive the delay time of the satellite
signal and thus correct the GPS universal time broadcast.
Ground The conductive soil whose electric potential can be equated with zero at
any point.
Near ground electrodes, the soil can have a potential not equal to zero.
This phenomenon is often referred to as “ground reference plane”.
Grounding Grounding means connecting an electroconductive component to →

ground using a grounding system.
Grounding system Grounding system encompasses all means and measures used for
grounding.
Group command With a group command, it is possible to output several successive →

commands. This function is used e.g. to implement the busbar change of
a feeder in switchgear.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Grz Basic cycle list, telecontrol list processing information necessary for com-
munication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction
(→ COM TC).
Hardware → Configuration
configuration
Hardware filter The hardware filter eliminates the transient conditions of a digital process
signal:
The value 1 is only transmitted if the signal level reaches at least 80% of
the “1” level for the duration of the parameterized filter time.
Hardware interrupt Hardware interrupts are triggered by hardware interrupt signals. These
interrupt signals can be assigned to a → task/an → organization block in
order to react to external process events.
Hierarchical level In a structure with higher-level and subordinate objects, a hierarchical

level consists of objects of the same level.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardization

body
→ Telecontrol protocol
→ Bay device protocol
IED Intelligent Electronic Device → bay device
IM Interface module for connecting expansion units.
Interface → MPI (multipoint interface)

→ Process-end interfaces
IRIG-B Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO 9001:2000 The ISO 9000 ff. standards define measures for assuring the quality of a
product from development to manufacturing.
Isolated On isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control

and the load circuit are isolated (e.g. by optocouplers, relay contacts or
transformers). Several load circuits can be connected to a common
potential.
IT → Metered value (integrated totals)

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
IWV Indication with value, e.g. a protection device indication which contains
the interrupted current or the fault location
K-Bus The K-Bus (communications bus) is a serial backplane bus which is opti-
mized for the exchange of large data volumes.
Interrupt For the operating system, an interrupt is an event which controls the exe-
cution of the application program. There are different interrupt classes.
When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically invokes an
assigned organization block, in which the user can program the desired
reaction (e.g. in an FB).
→ Hardware interrupt
→ Cyclic interrupt
Job buffer The job buffer of the outputs (German abbreviation: APA) is used to
buffer → commands on the CO (command output) and CR (command
release) function modules. Only one command at a time can be written
into the APA. After the command execution, the APA is cleared once
again.
Load memory The load memory is part of the CPU. It contains the objects generated by
the programming device (PG) and is either implemented on a plug-in
Memory Card or as built-in memory.
Load power supply Power supply for powering the input/output circuits, the sensors and the
actuators.
Main memory The main memory is a RAM on the → CPU which the processor
accesses during program execution.
MCP assembly An MCP assembly consists of the MCP communications module and the
XC2 and/or XF6 expansion modules. These modules are linked by
means of lateral connectors and are plugged into the rack as one unit.
MCP module → Communications processor
Memory Card Memory Cards are storage media in credit card format for the CPU. They
are implemented as → RAM or → FLASH-EPROM.
ME_NA → Measured value, normalized value
ME_NC → Measured value, short floating point

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Metered value Metered values are a processing function that determine the total amount
of discrete similar events (count impulses), mostly as an integral over a
time period. In the power supply industry normally electrical energy is
recorded as a metered value (Energy import /–supply, energy transport).
MIM → Module Information Manager
Module The MIM table shows all connections of the input/output modules which
information have been chosen in the Hardware Configuration as well as the SAS
manager information currently assigned to it.
Module Module parameters are variables which serve for determining the behav-
parameters ior of the module.
Moving contact An auxiliary contact on the transformer which indicates whether the tap
changing function on the transformer is activated.
MPI The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programming device interface of the
CPU. It serves as interface for downloading the system configuration
which has been parameterized before with SICAM plusTOOLS, and for
connecting the → SICAM Diamond. With the help of an MPI, it is possible
to realize simple networks. Each station is identified by a unique address
(MPI address).
MPI address → MPI
Multiple command With a multiple command, it is possible to output several → commands

simultaneously.
Non-isolated On non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the

control and the load circuit are electrically connected.
OB → Priority class (M7)

→ Organization block (S7).
Operating system The operating system of the CPU organizes all functions and operations
of the CPU of the → CPU which are independent of the control tasks of the applica-
tion program.
Operational status The automation systems of the SIMATIC S7 family knows the following
operational statuses: STOP, → STARTUP, RUN.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Organization block Orgnanization blocks (OBs) correspond to tasks. They perform the inter-
face between the S7-CPU operating system and the user program. We
provide you CFC blocks and run-time groups. The order of processing of
the user program is specified in the organization blocks.
Parameter − Variable of a code block

− Variable for determining the behavior of a module (one or several
ones per module). Each module has appropriate factory settings,
which can be modified with the help of the Hardware Configuration
application of STEP 7.
P-Bus The P-bus (I/O-bus) is a parallel backplane bus optimized for the rapid
exchange of I/O data.
PCM Pulse code modulation
PDM Pulse duration modulation
Per Subordinate basic cycle list, telecontrol list processing the information
necessary for communication with higher-level control centers in moni-
toring direction (→ COM TC).
PG → Programming device
PII The process input image reflects the current status of the process inputs.
The input modules keep a PII for their inputs. These PIIs are read by the
CPU before each user program cycle and are combined to a system-end
process input image.
PIO The process output image reflects the current status of the process out-
puts. After each user program cycle, the CPU copies the system-end pro-
cess output image kept in its main memory into the PIO of the output
modules. These output the contents of their PIO at the outputs.
PLC → Programmable logic controller
Priority class In the M7 family, priority classes constitute the interface between the
operating system of the CPU and the application program. The order of
execution of the application is defined in the → tasks. The priority classes
are mapped to RMOS tasks. A priority class corresponds to a → task.
Process-end inter- Interfaces of the → communications processors of the → SICAM RTU/

faces eRTU to higher-level control centers and/or bay devices.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Process image Reserved RAM areas of a CPU where the signal states of the input and
output modules are stored.
Programmable Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose

logic controller functions are stored as a program in the control unit. Thus the design and
the wiring of the device do not depend upon the function of the controller.
Programmable logic controllers have the same components as comput-
ers: they consist of a CPU with memory, input/output modules (e.g. DI,
AI, CO, CR), power supply module (PS) and rack (with bus system). The
I/Os and the programming language are especially designed to meet the
requirements of control engineering.
Programming Programming devices (PGs) are compact, portable, industry-standard

device personal computers. They distinguish themselves by having special
hardware and software features suitable for programmable logic control-
lers.
PS Power supply module
Rack A rack consists of a flat aluminum extruded section and the backplane
PCB. Racks are used for plugging in the modules.
RAM RAM (Random Access Memory) is a semiconductor memory for read/

write access. This memory incorporates the main memory of the CPU.
RC → Regulation step command
Release The release is part of the command execution. The release switches the
command output voltage through to the checked command output circuit
for a defined time.
RESET The RESET command serves for resetting a device/system and forcing
a restart.
Restore command Restore command for metered values (counter interrogation command).
The restore command is automatically generated as soon as metered
value capturing has been parameterized for a DI module or a bay device.
The restore command refers to the entire module or bay device.
RIO file Relay data Interchange format by Omicron. File format for fault records.
RSxxx interface Serial interfaces of the → MCP assembly (RS232, RS422/485)
Runtime error Errors which occur during execution of the application program in the
automation system (i.e. not in the process).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
SA Switch authority command
SAS information Items of SAS information are objects in the PG/PC which serve for orga-
nizing the distribution of individual items of information in the SICAM run-
time system. Each SAS information represents a certain indication or a
certain command which is to be distributed within the system. This distri-
bution takes place both between the individual modules and between the
connected devices and stations.
S-Bus Via the S-bus, the external interfaces of the MCP communications mod-
ule and its expansion modules XC2 and XF6 are assigned to the inter-
faces of the MCP controller.
SC-CPU CPU of the SICAM SC from the SIMATIC M7-400 family.
SC_PER → Single command, persistent command
SC_PUL → Single command, pulse command
SE_Dx Digital setpoint value (setpoint command digital x bits)

x designates the size on bits (8 or 16 bits).
SE_NA Analog setpoint value (setpoint command, normalized value)
SE_NC Analog setpoint value (setpoint command, short floating point)
Shielding Grounding whose sole purpose is to guarantee that the electrical equip-
ment functions as intended. Shielding short-circuits interference voltages
which would otherwise lead to inadmissible interferences in the electrical
equipment.
Short-time indica- Single-point indications are parameterized as short-time indications if

tion they are available in the system only for a short time and therefore must
be retained for some time in order to guarantee that they are detected
reliably.
SICAM Diamond SICAM Diamond is a web-based tool for performing diagnoses on the →
SICAM eRTU and also on the bay devices connected to the
SICAM eRTU. In addition to this, SICAM Diamond provides access to an
event list and allows easy controlling of switching devices.
SICAM eRTU Compared to → SICAM RTU, the SICAM eRTU (enhanced RTU) tele-
control system provides an advanced functionality. As an example, it also
includes an option for the configuration of automation functions via →

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
CFC blocks. Process information can be linked directly (central process

interfacing) and also via bay devices / telecontrol devices (distributed
process interfacing).
SICAM PCC The SICAM PC Controller is a software solution for the configuration and
monitoring of substations. SICAM PCC makes use of existing commun-
cations standards and connections.
SICAM RTU Modularly designed terminal unit on the basis of the SIMATIC S7 auto-
mation system.
Signal status indi- Signal status indications are the display elements (light-emitting diodes)
cations at the front panel of the modules. They indicate the status of the process
inputs and outputs. Thus, e.g., the signal status indicator of a digital input
module lights up if the input voltage is applied to the corresponding input.
Signal modules Signal Modules (SM) are signal converters without any intelligence of
their own which carry out a signal level adaptation between the process
and the automation system.
Signalling circuit A signalling circuit is a circuit used to generate an indication. It includes

the signalling-circuit voltage, the signalling contact and the wiring leading
to the input of the DI module.
SIM The SICAM Information Manager application serves for managing the
SAS information of the system.
SIMATIC Manager The SIMATIC Manager is a tool used for configuring the hardware of the
→ Substation Controller. The SIMATIC Manager constitutes the platform
for SICAM plusTOOLS.
SIM-Browser The SIM Browser is an overview over the complete station topology, with
all defined pieces of SAS information
Single command Single commands are process outputs which represent 2 process states
at 1 output (e.g. ON/OFF).
Single-point indica- Single-point indications are items of process information which represent
tion 2 process states at 1 input (e.g. ON/OFF).
Slot A slot is the position in a → rack where the individual modules of an auto-
mation system are mounted. For some modules (e.g. PS power supply
module, IM interface module), there are fixed slot positions.
SM Signal modules

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
SP → Single-point indication
SP_F → Fleeting indication (single-point, fleeting)
SP_S → Short-time indication (single-point, short-time)
ST → Transformer tap indication (step position information)
STARTUP A device passes the STARTUP operational status during the transition
from the STOP operational status to the RUN operational status. The
change of the operational status can be triggered by the mode selector
switch, after Power-ON or by operator input at the programming device.
Station configura- The *.CSV station configuration file contains information on protection
tion file devices whose data are requested by → SICAM Diamond. It is generated
per station by the configuration system SICAM plusTOOLS.
Station topology Distribution of the system data to different → hierarchical levels and
assignment of devices to these hierarchical levels.
Status/ Status and fault indications are LEDs which are arranged at the front
fault indications panel of S7-400 or M7-400 modules. They provide information on the
module state.
STEP 7 STEP 7 serves as basic software for SICAM plusTOOLS and for CFC.
STEP 7 incorporates the programming languages LAD and STL.
Surge voltage Procedure for testing the interference immunity (e.g. of the process
inputs/outputs) according to IEC 60255–5. The type of coupling and the
physical magnitudes (peak voltage, rate of rise, etc.) are defined in the
IEC standard.
System data blocks System data blocks (SDBs) are data areas in the program which contain
the system data and which determine operational sequences.
System function A system function block (SFB) is a function block which is integrated in
blocks the operating system of the CPU. It can be invoked, if necessary, from
the STEP 7 application program.
System function A system function call (SFC) is the invocation routine of a system function
call which is integrated in the operating system of the CPU. With function
modules, SFCs are used for reading out the → event buffer of the inputs
(EPE), writing into the → job buffer of the outputs (APA) and handing
over control commands.

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
System memory The system memory is integrated on the CPU and implemented as RAM.
The system memory contains the operand areas (e.g. timers, counters,
flags) as well as the data areas internally used by the operating system
(e.g. stack memory area).
Task Tasks constitute the interface between the operating system of the
M7-CPU and the application program. In the tasks, the order of execution
of the application programs is defined. A task corresponds to an OB (S7)
or a → priority class (M7).
TCC Telecontrol Center, higher-level control center communicating with the →

SICAM RTU/eRTU.
Telecontrol Protocol which is used for communication between the substation con-
protocol troller and control centers, e.g. IEC 60870-5-101
Thresholds Thresholds are a processing function on analog input modules which are
used to reduce the input data volume, where minor signal changes are
also processed, provided that they persist for some time.
Time stamping Time stamping means assigning real time to a process event. The time
stamping on the FMs consist of milliseconds, seconds and minutes. The
hour and the date are added on the CPU.
Transducer A transducer is an electrical device for the potential isolation and the con-
version of a wide variety of measured variables to standardized measur-
ing signals (e.g. load-independent direct current).
Transformer tap A transformer tap indication is a processing function on DI modules which

indication makes it possible to acquire and process the different transformer tap
positions.
Transmission → Telecontrol protocol

protocols → Bay device protocol
Trigger storage list Telecontrol list that processes the information necessary for communica-
tion with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction (→ COM TC).
TSPmZ Telegram memory list with time, telecontrol list processing information
TSPoZ Telegram memory list without time, telecontrol list processing information

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary
Ungrounded Without any electrical connection to the → ground.
VDEW Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizitätswerke (Association of German Power

Plants), standardization body.
Version identifier The version identifier allows the user to identify a module. It includes
type, hardware/software release and date of creation.
Watchdog A watchdog is a hardware circuit for monitoring a microprocessor. If, due

to a hardware or software fault, the periodic restart of an interval fails to
take place, an → interrupt (NMI) is triggered on the microprocessor.
X.21 X.21 is a synchronous interface. Its transmission rate is determined by an

external cycle (e.g. by the control center).
X-Bus The x-bus handles the control of the serial multiplexer of the MCP com-
munications module and its XC2 and XF6 expansion modules.
XC2 Expansion module within the → MCP assembly for connecting the
SICAM RTU/eRTU to higher-level control centers and for connecting →
bay devices with serial interfaces.
XF6 Expansion module within the → MCP assembly for connecting the
SICAM SC to higher-level control centers and for connecting → bay
devices with fiber optic interfaces.
Zä Counter-controlled list, telecontrol list processing information necessary

for communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direc-
tion (→ COM TC).
Ze Time-controlled list, telecontrol list processing information necessary for

communication with higher-level control centers in monitoring direction
(→ COM TC).

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Glossary

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Index
A K bus 44
A/D converter P bus 44
Amplifier 105 S bus 66
Calibration 105 X bus 66
Absolute time 230, 252
Address field 293
C
IEC60870-5-101 221 Cabinet
Address portion Features 36
SINAUT 8-FW 257 Lighting 38
AI Power supply 36
Current inputs 103 Cable
Input area 175 Fibre-optic cables 38
Voltage inputs 103 Shield 38
Analog scheduled values 29 Calibration 105
Application Area Cause of transmission 226
IEC 60870-5-104 243 IEC 60870-5-104 248
Application area Central rack 29
TELEGYR 800 293 Channel monitoring 236
Application layer Channel monitoring time 236
IEC 60870-5-101 216 Chatter blocking 167
IEC 60870-5-104 238 Class 1 data 205
TELEGYR 800 290 Clock
asynchronous interface 215, 237, 289 Master 154
Clock synchronization 71
B Coding switch
Backplane bus 42, 45 IM 84
Back-up battery 27, 47 COM TC 194
Balanced Mode 204 Command output circuit 28
Basic Cycle 211 Command output voltage 122
Batteries 47 Command release 122
Bay controllers 192 Communication
Bay devices 191 Processors 18
Catalogue 192 Protocols 18
DNP V3.00 192 Communication principle 215
IEC 60870-5-103 192 Communications bus (K bus) 44
Interfaces 30 Connectors 77
Third-party manufacturer 192 Control centre interface 20
User-definable device 192 Control field
Bit pattern IEC 60870-5-101 219, 220
Trigger 166 IEC 60870-5-104 240
Bit transmission layer 215 CPU
Bitstring 29, 92, 161 Key switch 54
Bus connector 65 LEDs 51
Bus systems Mode selector switch 53

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Index
Status/fault indicators 51 H
Crimp contacts 90 Hamming distance 213
Cyclic data transmission 211 Hardware filter time 167, 188
D I
DCF77 134, 154 I/O bus (P Bus) 44
Diagnosis alarm release 175, 188 I/O modules
Digital pulse duration modulation (DPDM) AI 100
203 CO 109
Digital scheduled values 29 CR 119
DNP V3.0 Degree of protection 90
Telegram fragment 278 DI 92
Telegram layout 278 LEDs 132
DNP V3.00 30, 191, 276 Requirements 90
Physical layer 277 IEC 60870-5-101 30, 191
Dongle 63 Rules for transmission 217
Double command 29, 109, 181 Telegram Length 217
Double-point indication 29, 92, 159 IEC 60870-5-103 30, 191
IEC 60870-5-104 30
E Telegram variants 239
Electrical isolation 122 IM 83
Electromagnetic compatibility 27 Coding switch 84
EMC 27 Local links 84
Environmental conditions 32 Receive module 84
Error bit 269 Remote links 87
Event buffer 92, 175 Send module 84
Expansion module Status/fault indicators 84
XC2 module 77 Terminator 85
XF6 79 Information address 295
Expansion rack 29 IEC 60870-5-104 250
External error bit 164 Information in control direction 306
External trigger 161 Information in monitoring direction 302
F Information object
Fault position suppression 168 IEC 60870-5-101 221, 228
Fibre-optic cables 60, 79 IEC 60870-5-104 243, 250
Technical data 81 Information points
FLASH EPROM 57 central 29
Fleeting indication 29, 92, 159 local 29
Format class 213 Interface modules 84
Frames 278 Interface modules IM 43, 83, 84
Front connector Interfaces 30, 289
Crimp contacts 90 Communications modules 60
Screw-type contacts 90 Fibre-optic cables 60
Spring-loaded terminals 90 MCP 71
Full cyclic mode 212 MPI 31, 55
Function field 293 RS232 60, 61, 72
RS422/RS485 60, 61, 73
G XC2 module 77
General interrogation 210 Interference voltage suppression 177
GPS 136, 138, 154 Internet layer
Group fault 150 IEC 60870-5-104 238
Group indications 150 IRIG-B 154
Group scan 210 ISO-OSI layer model 215, 237

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Index
K Memory card 57, 59

K bus 44 Metered value
Key switch 54 Counting memory 163
Meter pulse generator 163
L Metered values 29, 92
LED patterns Meter pulse edge 167
MCP 67 Meter pulses 163
LEDs 84 Restore trigger 171
CPU 51 Restoring 171
I/O modules 132 Mode
MCP 67 cyclic 211
PS module 47 spontaneous 208
XC2 module 77 Mode selector switch 53
Line lengths Modulation
FO cable 79 Digital pulse duration (DPDM) 203
IM 85, 87 Pulse code (PCM) 202
RS232 72 MPI connector 31
RS422/RS485 75 MPI interface 55
Link control Multi-point transmission 205, 272
IEC 60870-5-104 240
Link Header 279 O
Link Layer Operating modes 205
DNP V3.00 277 Operating system
Link layer 290 SICAM RTC 26
IEC 60870-5-101 216 Operation bit pattern 270
List Organization block 147
counter-controlled 212 Organizational Telegrams 266
periodic 211
time-controlled 212
P
List structure 206 P Bus 44
Load voltages 45 Periodic list 211
Local links 84 Physical layer
DNP V3.00 277
M IEC 60870-5-101 215
MCP 142 IEC 60870-5-104 237
Controller 65 Point-to-point transmission 204
Enclosure 65 Polling mode 204, 272
Interfaces 71 PPP layer
LEDs 67 IEC 60870-5-104 238
Memory 65 Process
Status/fault indicators 66 Interrupt 100
MCP assembly Signals 174
Clock master 154 Process image 92
Clock slave 154 Process image mode 158
Connector 66, 77, 79 PROFIBUS DP 29, 191
Interfaces 60 Protection devices 192
MCP assembly Interfaces 30 Protokollkombinationen 195, 214
MCP communications processor 60 PS module
Controller 65 Features 45
Memory 65 LEDs 47
Measured value 29 Status/fault indicators 47
Snapshot 177 PS power supply module 45
Memory Card 51, 55 Pulse code modulation (PCM) 202

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Index
Q IEC 60870-5-104 249

Quick check procedure 274 Status and diagnostic indications
AI 132
R DI 132
Racks 42 Status information 193
Reaction time 236 Status scan 236
Receive module 84 Status/diagnostic indications
Relative time 229 CO 132
Relay outputs 123 CR 132
Release relay 127 Status/fault indicators
Remote links 87 CPU 51
Request mode 158 IM 84
Reset 71 MCP 66
RS232 60, 61, 72 PS module 47
RS422 interface 215 XC2 module 77
RS422/RS485 60, 61, 73 Step position 162
RS485 interface 216 Step positions 29, 92
Substation automation system 15
S Substation communication 22, 192
S bus 66 Substation Controller SC 26
Safety Substations 191
Command output 28 Integration 192
Communication 27 Switching current check 123
Functions 27 Synchronization
Indication acquisition 28 Time 62
Measured value capturing 28 synchronous interface 216
Screw-type contacts 90
Send module 84 T
Shield 38 TCP/IP 30
SICAM eRTU Telecontrol
Expansion 29 Interfaces 30
SICAM plusTOOLS 26 Protocol 194
SICAM SAS System 15
Range of application 18 Telecontrol Protocol
Tasks 18 Link layer 290
Signaling circuit 95 TELEGYR 800 289, 290
Signaling-circuit voltage 95 Telecontrol transmission protocols 213
SIM 193 Telegram fragment 278
SIMATIC standard modules 33 Telegram ID
SINAUT 8-FW 30 IEC 60870-5-101 221
Modulation procedures 256 IEC 60870-5-104 243
Telegram Structure 259 Telegram layout
Single command 29, 109, 180 DNP V3.00 277
Single fault 150 IEC 60870-5-101 217
Single-point indication 29, 92, 159 IEC 60870-5-104 239
Slots 29, 42 SINAUT 8-FW 257
Software Telegram protection 213
STEP 7 26 SINAUT 8-FW 257
Spontaneous event capturing 92 Telegram Structure
Spring-loaded terminals 90 SINAUT 8-FW 259
ST connectors 79 Telegram type
Startup procedure 233 Indications 261
Station address Measured-values 263

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Index
SINAUT 8-FW 259 Transport layer

Switching commands 265 IEC 60870-5-104 238
TELEGYR Trigger delay 164, 188
Hardware address 295 Types of transmission 205
TELEGYR 800 30, 289
Address field 293 U
Application area 293 Unbalanced Mode 205
Application layer 290
V
Communication principle 289
V.24/V.28 interface 215, 237, 289
Function field 293
Variable structure identifier
Information address 295
IEC 60870-5-101 225
Information in control direction 306
IEC 60870-5-104 247
Information in monitoring direction 302
Interfaces 289 W
Link layer 290 Wave length 79
Rules for transmission 291
Telegram layout 292 X
TELEGYR 8979 30 X bus 66
Terminating resitor 73 X.21 interface 216
Terminator 85 XC2 62
Threshold processing 175 XC2 module 77
Time 62 LEDs 77
Slave 154 Status and fault indications 77
Time monitoring 236 XF6 62, 79
Time signal 134, 136, 138
Telegrams from control centre 154 Z
Time signal receiver 154 Zero suppression 176
Time signal receivers 62
DCF77 134
GPS 136, 138
Time synchronization 134, 136, 138
Transformer taps
Encoding 169
external error bit 164
Trigger 168
Transmission channel
Monitoring 236
Transmission Lists
Number 207
Structure 206
Transmission mode
symmetric 208
Transmission procedure
Asymmetric 205
Symmetric 204
Transmission protocol
Telecontrol 213
Transmission protocols 194
Transmission rate 72, 75
Transmission speed
SINAUT 8-FW 256
Transport Header
DNP 278

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Index

E50417-S8976-C179-A2
To:
Siemens AG
PTD PA D DM
Postfach 4806
90026 Nürnberg, Germany
From:
Your name : ..........................................................................................................
Your title : ..........................................................................................................
Your company : ..........................................................................................................
Department : ..........................................................................................................
Street : ..........................................................................................................
City, State : ..........................................................................................................
Phone : ..........................................................................................................
FAX : ..........................................................................................................
Please indicate your area of work with a checkmark:
Automation Building services, air conditioning

Mining (incl. strip mining) Heavy machine construction, handling
systems
Chemical industry
Pipelines
Power generation
Shipbuilding, navigation
Power distribution, power system
management Environmental technology
Gas/water/sanitary utilities Traffic and transportation
Other
Comments / Suggestions
Your comments and suggestions will help us to improve the usability of our
documentation. Please fill out this questionnaire and mail or fax it back to Siemens
(FAX number +49 911 433-8518).
Title of the Manual: SICAM eRTU, Technical Description

Order No. of the Manual: E50417-S8976-C179-A2
Please answer the following questions by giving a rating between 1 = good and 5 =
poor.
1. Do the contents cover your requirements? ................

2. Were you able to find the information you need easily? ................
3. Did you find the texts easy to understand? ................
4. Does the information depth meet your requirements? ................
5. How do you rate the quality of the illustrations? ................
If you have encountered any specific problems, please give us a concise description
below:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

ERTU Tech Description

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

ERTU Tech Description

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Foreword, Table of Contents

The SICAM eRTU System 1

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Book No. E50417-S8976-C179-A2

Purpose of this In this manual, you will find a

Scope of validity of SICAM eRTU Version 5.10

Hotline Our hotline offers you around-the-clock support.

SICAM eRTU Technical Description 3

Overview over the SICAM for eRTU Documentation

Planning • Which hardware and software components are necessary for

Ordering • Who can provide support on technical and handling questions?

Assembling, • Which safety measures are required?

Installing the • How do I proceed for installing?

Configuring / • Which is the right order for configuring/parameterizing?

4 SICAM eRTU Technical Description

/20/ SICAM eRTU, Startup

Configuring • Where do I configure a control?

Commissioning • How do I avoid disturbances, accidents when commissioning my

Diagnostics / • Does the system require any maintenance?

SICAM eRTU Technical Description 5

6 SICAM eRTU Technical Description

1 The SICAM eRTU System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.1 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.1.1 SICAM eRTU system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.1.2 Options for expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.1.3 SICAM eRTU Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.2 System Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

1.3 System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.3.3 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2 Basic Components of the SICAM eRTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.1 Mounting of the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.1.1 Description of Free-Standing Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.1.2 Technical Specifications of the Free-Standing Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

2.1.3 Wall-Mounting Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

2.2.1 UR1/UR2 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

2.2.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

SICAM eRTU Technical Description 7

2.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

2.3.2 Battery Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

2.3.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

2.4 CPU (Central Processing Unit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.4.1 CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.4.2 Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.4.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

2.5 MCP Communications Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

2.5.1 MCP Communications Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

2.5.2 25-Pin RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

2.5.3 25-Pin RS422/RS485 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2.5.4 XC2 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

2.5.5 XF6 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.5.6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

2.6 IM Interface Module to Expansion Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

2.6.1 IM 460-0 / IM 461-0 Interface Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

2.6.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

2.6.3 IM 460-3 / IM 461-3 Interface Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3 Input / Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

3.1 Module Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3.2 DI Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

3.2.1 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

3.2.2 Electrical Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

3.2.3 Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

3.2.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

8 SICAM eRTU Technical Description

3.3 AI Analogue Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.3.1 Input Circuit of the AI-32 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3.3.2 Input Circuit of the AI-16 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3.3.3 Overvoltage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3.3.4 Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104